blob: 7209a1ae2640eccd29cb25ed07d4f7e0550d765e [file] [log] [blame]
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001/* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2 *
3 * VIM - Vi IMproved by Bram Moolenaar
4 *
5 * Do ":help uganda" in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6 * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7 * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8 */
9
10/*
11 * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12 */
13
14#include "vim.h"
15#include "version.h"
16
17#ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18# include <fcntl.h> /* for chdir() */
19#endif
20
21static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
24static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext));
25#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000026static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u *src));
27
28/*
29 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
30 */
31 int
32get_indent()
33{
34 return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
35}
36
37/*
38 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
39 */
40 int
41get_indent_lnum(lnum)
42 linenr_T lnum;
43{
44 return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
45}
46
47#if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
48/*
49 * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
50 * "buf".
51 */
52 int
53get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
54 buf_T *buf;
55 linenr_T lnum;
56{
57 return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
58}
59#endif
60
61/*
62 * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
63 * 'tabstop' at "ts"
64 */
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000065 int
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000066get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
67 char_u *ptr;
68 int ts;
69{
70 int count = 0;
71
72 for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
73 {
74 if (*ptr == TAB) /* count a tab for what it is worth */
75 count += ts - (count % ts);
76 else if (*ptr == ' ')
77 ++count; /* count a space for one */
78 else
79 break;
80 }
Bram Moolenaar4399ef42005-02-12 14:29:27 +000081 return count;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +000082}
83
84/*
85 * Set the indent of the current line.
86 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
87 * Caller must take care of undo.
88 * "flags":
89 * SIN_CHANGED: call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
90 * SIN_INSERT: insert the indent in front of the line.
91 * SIN_UNDO: save line for undo before changing it.
92 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
93 */
94 int
95set_indent(size, flags)
96 int size;
97 int flags;
98{
99 char_u *p;
100 char_u *newline;
101 char_u *oldline;
102 char_u *s;
103 int todo;
104 int ind_len;
105 int line_len;
106 int doit = FALSE;
107 int ind_done;
108 int tab_pad;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000109 int retval = FALSE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000110
111 /*
112 * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
113 * characters needed for the indent.
114 */
115 todo = size;
116 ind_len = 0;
117 p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
118
119 /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
120 * isn't already set */
121
122 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
123 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
124 {
125 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
126 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
127 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
128 {
129 ind_done = 0;
130
131 /* count as many characters as we can use */
132 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
133 {
134 if (*p == TAB)
135 {
136 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
137 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
138 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
139 if (todo < tab_pad)
140 break;
141 todo -= tab_pad;
142 ++ind_len;
143 ind_done += tab_pad;
144 }
145 else
146 {
147 --todo;
148 ++ind_len;
149 ++ind_done;
150 }
151 ++p;
152 }
153
154 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
155 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
156 if (todo >= tab_pad)
157 {
158 doit = TRUE;
159 todo -= tab_pad;
160 ++ind_len;
161 /* ind_done += tab_pad; */
162 }
163 }
164
165 /* count tabs required for indent */
166 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
167 {
168 if (*p != TAB)
169 doit = TRUE;
170 else
171 ++p;
172 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
173 ++ind_len;
174 /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
175 }
176 }
177 /* count spaces required for indent */
178 while (todo > 0)
179 {
180 if (*p != ' ')
181 doit = TRUE;
182 else
183 ++p;
184 --todo;
185 ++ind_len;
186 /* ++ind_done; */
187 }
188
189 /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
190 if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
191 return FALSE;
192
193 /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
194 if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
195 p = oldline;
196 else
197 p = skipwhite(p);
198 line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
199 newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
200 if (newline == NULL)
201 return FALSE;
202
203 /* Put the characters in the new line. */
204 s = newline;
205 todo = size;
206 /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
207 if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
208 {
209 /* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
210 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
211 if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
212 {
213 p = oldline;
214 ind_done = 0;
215
216 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
217 {
218 if (*p == TAB)
219 {
220 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
221 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
222 /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
223 if (todo < tab_pad)
224 break;
225 todo -= tab_pad;
226 ind_done += tab_pad;
227 }
228 else
229 {
230 --todo;
231 ++ind_done;
232 }
233 *s++ = *p++;
234 }
235
236 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
237 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
238 if (todo >= tab_pad)
239 {
240 *s++ = TAB;
241 todo -= tab_pad;
242 }
243
244 p = skipwhite(p);
245 }
246
247 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
248 {
249 *s++ = TAB;
250 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
251 }
252 }
253 while (todo > 0)
254 {
255 *s++ = ' ';
256 --todo;
257 }
258 mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
259
260 /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
261 if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
262 {
263 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
264 if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
265 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
266 /* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
267 if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
268 && saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
269 saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000270 retval = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000271 }
272 else
273 vim_free(newline);
274
275 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
Bram Moolenaar5409c052005-03-18 20:27:04 +0000276 return retval;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000277}
278
279/*
280 * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
281 * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
282 * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
283 */
284 static int
285copy_indent(size, src)
286 int size;
287 char_u *src;
288{
289 char_u *p = NULL;
290 char_u *line = NULL;
291 char_u *s;
292 int todo;
293 int ind_len;
294 int line_len = 0;
295 int tab_pad;
296 int ind_done;
297 int round;
298
299 /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
300 * Round 2: copy the characters. */
301 for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
302 {
303 todo = size;
304 ind_len = 0;
305 ind_done = 0;
306 s = src;
307
308 /* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
309 while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
310 {
311 if (*s == TAB)
312 {
313 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
314 - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
315 /* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
316 if (todo < tab_pad)
317 break;
318 todo -= tab_pad;
319 ind_done += tab_pad;
320 }
321 else
322 {
323 --todo;
324 ++ind_done;
325 }
326 ++ind_len;
327 if (round == 2)
328 *p++ = *s;
329 ++s;
330 }
331
332 /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
333 tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
334 if (todo >= tab_pad)
335 {
336 todo -= tab_pad;
337 ++ind_len;
338 if (round == 2)
339 *p++ = TAB;
340 }
341
342 /* Add tabs required for indent */
343 while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
344 {
345 todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
346 ++ind_len;
347 if (round == 2)
348 *p++ = TAB;
349 }
350
351 /* Count/add spaces required for indent */
352 while (todo > 0)
353 {
354 --todo;
355 ++ind_len;
356 if (round == 2)
357 *p++ = ' ';
358 }
359
360 if (round == 1)
361 {
362 /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
363 * and the rest of the line. */
364 line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
365 line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
366 if (line == NULL)
367 return FALSE;
368 p = line;
369 }
370 }
371
372 /* Append the original line */
373 mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
374
375 /* Replace the line */
376 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
377
378 /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
379 curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
380 return TRUE;
381}
382
383/*
384 * Return the indent of the current line after a number. Return -1 if no
385 * number was found. Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000386 * Since a pattern is used it can actually handle more than numbers.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000387 */
388 int
389get_number_indent(lnum)
390 linenr_T lnum;
391{
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000392 colnr_T col;
393 pos_T pos;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000394 regmmatch_T regmatch;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000395
396 if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
397 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +0000398 pos.lnum = 0;
399 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(curbuf->b_p_flp, RE_MAGIC);
400 if (regmatch.regprog != NULL)
401 {
402 regmatch.rmm_ic = FALSE;
403 if (vim_regexec_multi(&regmatch, curwin, curbuf, lnum, (colnr_T)0))
404 {
405 pos.lnum = regmatch.endpos[0].lnum + lnum;
406 pos.col = regmatch.endpos[0].col;
407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
408 pos.coladd = 0;
409#endif
410 }
411 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
412 }
413
414 if (pos.lnum == 0 || *ml_get_pos(&pos) == NUL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000415 return -1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +0000416 getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
417 return (int)col;
418}
419
420#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
421
422static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
423
424/*
425 * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
426 */
427 static int
428cin_is_cinword(line)
429 char_u *line;
430{
431 char_u *cinw;
432 char_u *cinw_buf;
433 int cinw_len;
434 int retval = FALSE;
435 int len;
436
437 cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
438 cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
439 if (cinw_buf != NULL)
440 {
441 line = skipwhite(line);
442 for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
443 {
444 len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
445 if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
446 && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
447 {
448 retval = TRUE;
449 break;
450 }
451 }
452 vim_free(cinw_buf);
453 }
454 return retval;
455}
456#endif
457
458/*
459 * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
460 *
461 * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
462 * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
463 *
464 * Caller must take care of undo. Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
465 * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
466 * new line.
467 * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES delete spaces after cursor
468 * OPENLINE_DO_COM format comments
469 * OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL keep trailing spaces
470 * OPENLINE_MARKFIX adjust mark positions after the line break
471 *
472 * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
473 */
474 int
475open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
476 int dir; /* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
477 int flags;
478 int old_indent; /* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
479{
480 char_u *saved_line; /* copy of the original line */
481 char_u *next_line = NULL; /* copy of the next line */
482 char_u *p_extra = NULL; /* what goes to next line */
483 int less_cols = 0; /* less columns for mark in new line */
484 int less_cols_off = 0; /* columns to skip for mark adjust */
485 pos_T old_cursor; /* old cursor position */
486 int newcol = 0; /* new cursor column */
487 int newindent = 0; /* auto-indent of the new line */
488 int n;
489 int trunc_line = FALSE; /* truncate current line afterwards */
490 int retval = FALSE; /* return value, default is FAIL */
491#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
492 int extra_len = 0; /* length of p_extra string */
493 int lead_len; /* length of comment leader */
494 char_u *lead_flags; /* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
495 char_u *leader = NULL; /* copy of comment leader */
496#endif
497 char_u *allocated = NULL; /* allocated memory */
498#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
499 || defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
500 char_u *p;
501#endif
502 int saved_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
503#if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
504 pos_T *pos;
505#endif
506#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
507 int do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
508# ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
509 && !curbuf->b_p_cin
510# endif
511 );
512 int no_si = FALSE; /* reset did_si afterwards */
513 int first_char = NUL; /* init for GCC */
514#endif
515#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
516 int vreplace_mode;
517#endif
518 int did_append; /* appended a new line */
519 int saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
520
521 /*
522 * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
523 */
524 saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
525 if (saved_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
526 return FALSE;
527
528#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
529 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
530 {
531 /*
532 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
533 * starting to replace. First make the new line empty and let vim play
534 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content. Then
535 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
536 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
537 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
538 * stuff onto the replace stack. -- webb.
539 */
540 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
541 next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
542 else
543 next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
544 if (next_line == NULL) /* out of memory! */
545 goto theend;
546
547 /*
548 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
549 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
550 * line onto the replace stack. We'll push any other characters that
551 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
552 * etc) a bit later.
553 */
554 replace_push(NUL); /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
555 replace_push(NUL);
556 p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
557 while (*p != NUL)
558 replace_push(*p++);
559 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
560 }
561#endif
562
563 if ((State & INSERT)
564#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
565 && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
566#endif
567 )
568 {
569 p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
570#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
571 if (do_si) /* need first char after new line break */
572 {
573 p = skipwhite(p_extra);
574 first_char = *p;
575 }
576#endif
577#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
578 extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
579#endif
580 saved_char = *p_extra;
581 *p_extra = NUL;
582 }
583
584 u_clearline(); /* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
585#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
586 did_si = FALSE;
587#endif
588 ai_col = 0;
589
590 /*
591 * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
592 * the prior line, and it should be truncated. Do this even if 'ai' is not
593 * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
594 */
595 if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
596 trunc_line = TRUE;
597
598 /*
599 * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
600 * indent to use for the new line.
601 */
602 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
603#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
604 || do_si
605#endif
606 )
607 {
608 /*
609 * count white space on current line
610 */
611 newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
612 if (newindent == 0)
613 newindent = old_indent; /* for ^^D command in insert mode */
614
615#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
616 /*
617 * Do smart indenting.
618 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
619 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
620 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
621 * "if (condition) {"
622 */
623 if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
624 && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
625 {
626 char_u *ptr;
627 char_u last_char;
628
629 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
630 ptr = saved_line;
631# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
632 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
633 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
634 else
635 lead_len = 0;
636# endif
637 if (dir == FORWARD)
638 {
639 /*
640 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
641 * recognised as comments.
642 */
643 if (
644# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
645 lead_len == 0 &&
646# endif
647 ptr[0] == '#')
648 {
649 while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
650 ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
651 newindent = get_indent();
652 }
653# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
654 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
655 lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
656 else
657 lead_len = 0;
658 if (lead_len > 0)
659 {
660 /*
661 * This case gets the following right:
662 * \*
663 * * A comment (read '\' as '/').
664 * *\
665 * #define IN_THE_WAY
666 * This should line up here;
667 */
668 p = skipwhite(ptr);
669 if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
670 p++;
671 if (p[0] == '*')
672 {
673 for (p++; *p; p++)
674 {
675 if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
676 {
677 /*
678 * End of C comment, indent should line up
679 * with the line containing the start of
680 * the comment
681 */
682 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
683 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
684 {
685 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
686 newindent = get_indent();
687 }
688 }
689 }
690 }
691 }
692 else /* Not a comment line */
693# endif
694 {
695 /* Find last non-blank in line */
696 p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
697 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
698 --p;
699 last_char = *p;
700
701 /*
702 * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
703 */
704 if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
705 {
706 if (p > ptr)
707 --p;
708 while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
709 --p;
710 }
711 /*
712 * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
713 * lines. eg:
714 * if (condition &&
715 * condition) {
716 * Should line up here!
717 * }
718 */
719 if (*p == ')')
720 {
721 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
722 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
723 {
724 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
725 newindent = get_indent();
726 ptr = ml_get_curline();
727 }
728 }
729 /*
730 * If last character is '{' do indent, without
731 * checking for "if" and the like.
732 */
733 if (last_char == '{')
734 {
735 did_si = TRUE; /* do indent */
736 no_si = TRUE; /* don't delete it when '{' typed */
737 }
738 /*
739 * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
740 * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
741 * '}'.
742 */
743 else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
744 && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
745 did_si = TRUE;
746 }
747 }
748 else /* dir == BACKWARD */
749 {
750 /*
751 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
752 * recognised as comments.
753 */
754 if (
755# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
756 lead_len == 0 &&
757# endif
758 ptr[0] == '#')
759 {
760 int was_backslashed = FALSE;
761
762 while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
763 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
764 {
765 if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
766 was_backslashed = TRUE;
767 else
768 was_backslashed = FALSE;
769 ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
770 }
771 if (was_backslashed)
772 newindent = 0; /* Got to end of file */
773 else
774 newindent = get_indent();
775 }
776 p = skipwhite(ptr);
777 if (*p == '}') /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
778 did_si = TRUE;
779 else /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
780 can_si_back = TRUE;
781 }
782 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
783 }
784 if (do_si)
785 can_si = TRUE;
786#endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
787
788 did_ai = TRUE;
789 }
790
791#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
792 /*
793 * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
794 * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
795 */
796 end_comment_pending = NUL;
797 if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
798 lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
799 else
800 lead_len = 0;
801 if (lead_len > 0)
802 {
803 char_u *lead_repl = NULL; /* replaces comment leader */
804 int lead_repl_len = 0; /* length of *lead_repl */
805 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
806 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
807 char_u *comment_end = NULL; /* where lead_end has been found */
808 int extra_space = FALSE; /* append extra space */
809 int current_flag;
810 int require_blank = FALSE; /* requires blank after middle */
811 char_u *p2;
812
813 /*
814 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
815 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
816 */
817 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
818 {
819 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
820 {
821 require_blank = TRUE;
822 continue;
823 }
824 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
825 {
826 current_flag = *p;
827 if (*p == COM_START)
828 {
829 /*
830 * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
831 */
832 if (dir == BACKWARD)
833 {
834 lead_len = 0;
835 break;
836 }
837
838 /* find start of middle part */
839 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
840 require_blank = FALSE;
841 }
842
843 /*
844 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
845 */
846 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of middle flags */
847 {
848 if (*p == COM_BLANK)
849 require_blank = TRUE;
850 ++p;
851 }
852 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
853
854 while (*p && p[-1] != ':') /* find end of end flags */
855 {
856 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
857 if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
858 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
859 ++p;
860 }
861 n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
862
863 if (end_comment_pending == -1) /* we can set it now */
864 end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
865
866 /*
867 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
868 * the comment leader.
869 */
870 if (dir == FORWARD)
871 {
872 for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
873 if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
874 {
875 comment_end = p;
876 lead_len = 0;
877 break;
878 }
879 }
880
881 /*
882 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
883 */
884 if (lead_len > 0)
885 {
886 if (current_flag == COM_START)
887 {
888 lead_repl = lead_middle;
889 lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
890 }
891
892 /*
893 * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
894 * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
895 * comment leader on the next line.
896 */
897 if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
898 && ((p_extra != NULL
899 && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
900 || (p_extra == NULL
901 && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
902 || require_blank))
903 extra_space = TRUE;
904 }
905 break;
906 }
907 if (*p == COM_END)
908 {
909 /*
910 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
911 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
912 * start (for C-comments).
913 */
914 if (dir == FORWARD)
915 {
916 comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
917 lead_len = 0;
918 break;
919 }
920
921 /*
922 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
923 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
924 */
925 while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
926 --p;
927 for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
928 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
929 ;
930 lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
931
932 /* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
933 * the comment-end */
934 extra_space = TRUE;
935
936 /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
937 for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
938 {
939 if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
940 end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
941 }
942 if (end_comment_pending == -1)
943 {
944 /* Find last character in end-comment string */
945 while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
946 p2++;
947 end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
948 }
949 break;
950 }
951 if (*p == COM_FIRST)
952 {
953 /*
954 * Comment leader for first line only: Don't repeat leader
955 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
956 */
957 if (dir == BACKWARD)
958 lead_len = 0;
959 else
960 {
961 lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
962 lead_repl_len = 0;
963 }
964 break;
965 }
966 }
967 if (lead_len)
968 {
969 /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
970 leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
971 extra_len + 1);
972 allocated = leader; /* remember to free it later */
973
974 if (leader == NULL)
975 lead_len = 0;
976 else
977 {
978 STRNCPY(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
979 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
980
981 /*
982 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
983 */
984 if (lead_repl != NULL)
985 {
986 int c = 0;
987 int off = 0;
988
989 for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
990 {
991 if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
992 c = *p;
993 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
994 off = getdigits(&p);
995 }
996 if (c == COM_RIGHT) /* right adjusted leader */
997 {
998 /* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
999 for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
1000 && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
1001 ;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001002 ++p;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001003
1004#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1005 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1006 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1007 {
1008 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1009 lead_repl_len);
1010 int old_size = 0;
1011 char_u *endp = p;
1012 int l;
1013
1014 while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1015 {
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001016 mb_ptr_back(leader, p);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001017 old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1018 }
1019 l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p);
1020 if (l != 0)
1021 mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1022 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1023 lead_len += l;
1024 }
1025#else
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001026 if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1027 p = leader;
1028 else
1029 p -= lead_repl_len;
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001030#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001031 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1032 if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1033 p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1034
1035 /* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1036 while (--p >= leader)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001037 {
1038#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1039 int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1040
1041 if (l > 1)
1042 {
1043 p -= l;
1044 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1045 {
1046 p[1] = ' ';
1047 --l;
1048 }
1049 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1050 (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1051 lead_len -= l;
1052 *p = ' ';
1053 }
1054 else
1055#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001056 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1057 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001058 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001059 }
1060 else /* left adjusted leader */
1061 {
1062 p = skipwhite(leader);
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001063#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1064 /* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1065 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1066 * not to be overwritten. */
1067 {
1068 int repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1069 lead_repl_len);
1070 int i;
1071 int l;
1072
1073 for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1074 {
1075 l = mb_ptr2len_check(p + i);
1076 if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1077 break;
1078 }
1079 if (i != lead_repl_len)
1080 {
1081 mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1082 (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1083 lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1084 }
1085 }
1086#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001087 mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1088
1089 /* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1090 * leader by spaces. Keep Tabs, the indent must
1091 * remain the same. */
1092 for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1093 if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1094 {
1095 /* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1096 if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1097 {
1098 --lead_len;
1099 mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1100 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1101 }
1102 else
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001103 {
1104#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1105 int l = mb_ptr2len_check(p);
1106
1107 if (l > 1)
1108 {
1109 if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1110 {
1111 /* Replace a double-wide char with
1112 * two spaces */
1113 --l;
1114 *p++ = ' ';
1115 }
1116 mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1117 (leader + lead_len) - p);
1118 lead_len -= l - 1;
1119 }
1120#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001121 *p = ' ';
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00001122 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001123 }
1124 *p = NUL;
1125 }
1126
1127 /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1128 if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1129#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1130 || do_si
1131#endif
1132 )
1133 newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1134
1135 /* Add the indent offset */
1136 if (newindent + off < 0)
1137 {
1138 off = -newindent;
1139 newindent = 0;
1140 }
1141 else
1142 newindent += off;
1143
1144 /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1145 * alignment remains equal. */
1146 while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1147 && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1148 {
1149 /* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1150 if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1151 break;
1152 --lead_len;
1153 --off;
1154 }
1155
1156 /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1157 * extra space */
1158 if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1159 extra_space = FALSE;
1160 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1161 }
1162
1163 if (extra_space)
1164 {
1165 leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1166 leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1167 }
1168
1169 newcol = lead_len;
1170
1171 /*
1172 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1173 * is in the comment leader
1174 */
1175 if (newindent
1176#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1177 || did_si
1178#endif
1179 )
1180 {
1181 while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1182 {
1183 --lead_len;
1184 --newcol;
1185 ++leader;
1186 }
1187 }
1188
1189 }
1190#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1191 did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1192#endif
1193 }
1194 else if (comment_end != NULL)
1195 {
1196 /*
1197 * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1198 * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1199 * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1200 * comment.
1201 */
1202 if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1203 (curbuf->b_p_ai
1204#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1205 || do_si
1206#endif
1207 ))
1208 {
1209 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1210 curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1211 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1212 {
1213 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1214 newindent = get_indent();
1215 }
1216 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1217 }
1218 }
1219 }
1220#endif
1221
1222 /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1223 if (p_extra != NULL)
1224 {
1225 *p_extra = saved_char; /* restore char that NUL replaced */
1226
1227 /*
1228 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1229 * non-blank.
1230 *
1231 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1232 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1233 */
1234 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1235 replace_push(NUL); /* end of extra blanks */
1236 if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1237 {
1238 while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1239#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1240 && (!enc_utf8
1241 || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1242#endif
1243 )
1244 {
1245 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1246 replace_push(*p_extra);
1247 ++p_extra;
1248 ++less_cols_off;
1249 }
1250 }
1251 if (*p_extra != NUL)
1252 did_ai = FALSE; /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1253
1254 /* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1255 less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1256 }
1257
1258 if (p_extra == NULL)
1259 p_extra = (char_u *)""; /* append empty line */
1260
1261#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1262 /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1263 if (lead_len)
1264 {
1265 STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1266 p_extra = leader;
1267 did_ai = TRUE; /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1268 less_cols -= lead_len;
1269 }
1270 else
1271 end_comment_pending = NUL; /* turns out there was no leader */
1272#endif
1273
1274 old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1275 if (dir == BACKWARD)
1276 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1277#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1278 if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1279#endif
1280 {
1281 if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1282 == FAIL)
1283 goto theend;
1284 /* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1285 * with markers. */
1286 mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1287 did_append = TRUE;
1288 }
1289#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1290 else
1291 {
1292 /*
1293 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1294 */
1295 curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1296 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1297 {
1298 /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1299 * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1300 */
1301 (void)u_save_cursor(); /* errors are ignored! */
1302 vr_lines_changed++;
1303 }
1304 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1305 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1306 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1307 did_append = FALSE;
1308 }
1309#endif
1310
1311 if (newindent
1312#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1313 || did_si
1314#endif
1315 )
1316 {
1317 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1318#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1319 if (did_si)
1320 {
1321 if (p_sr)
1322 newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1323 newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1324 }
1325#endif
1326 /* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1327 if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1328 {
1329 (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1330
1331 /*
1332 * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1333 * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1334 * it. It gets restored at the function end.
1335 */
1336 curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1337 }
1338 else
1339 (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1340 less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1341
1342 ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1343
1344 /*
1345 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1346 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1347 */
1348 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1349 for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1350 replace_push(NUL);
1351 newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1352#ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1353 if (no_si)
1354 did_si = FALSE;
1355#endif
1356 }
1357
1358#ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1359 /*
1360 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1361 * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1362 */
1363 if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1364 while (lead_len-- > 0)
1365 replace_push(NUL);
1366#endif
1367
1368 curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1369
1370 if (dir == FORWARD)
1371 {
1372 if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1373 {
1374 /* truncate current line at cursor */
1375 saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1376 /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1377 if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1378 truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1379 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1380 saved_line = NULL;
1381 if (did_append)
1382 {
1383 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1384 curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1385 did_append = FALSE;
1386
1387 /* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1388 if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1389 mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1390 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1391 1L, (long)-less_cols);
1392 }
1393 else
1394 changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1395 }
1396
1397 /*
1398 * Put the cursor on the new line. Careful: the scrollup() above may
1399 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1400 */
1401 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1402 }
1403 if (did_append)
1404 changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1405
1406 curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1407#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1408 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1409#endif
1410
1411#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1412 /*
1413 * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1414 * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1415 * normal INSERT mode.
1416 */
1417 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1418 {
1419 vreplace_mode = State; /* So we know to put things right later */
1420 State = INSERT;
1421 }
1422 else
1423 vreplace_mode = 0;
1424#endif
1425#ifdef FEAT_LISP
1426 /*
1427 * May do lisp indenting.
1428 */
1429 if (!p_paste
1430# ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1431 && leader == NULL
1432# endif
1433 && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1434 && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1435 {
1436 fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1437 p = ml_get_curline();
1438 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1439 }
1440#endif
1441#ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1442 /*
1443 * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1444 */
1445 if (!p_paste
1446 && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1447# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1448 || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1449# endif
1450 )
1451 && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1452 ? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1453 : KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1454 {
1455 do_c_expr_indent();
1456 p = ml_get_curline();
1457 ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1458 }
1459#endif
1460#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1461 if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1462 State = vreplace_mode;
1463#endif
1464
1465#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1466 /*
1467 * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1468 * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1469 * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1470 */
1471 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1472 {
1473 /* Put new line in p_extra */
1474 p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1475 if (p_extra == NULL)
1476 goto theend;
1477
1478 /* Put back original line */
1479 ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1480
1481 /* Insert new stuff into line again */
1482 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1483#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1484 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1485#endif
1486 ins_bytes(p_extra); /* will call changed_bytes() */
1487 vim_free(p_extra);
1488 next_line = NULL;
1489 }
1490#endif
1491
1492 retval = TRUE; /* success! */
1493theend:
1494 curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1495 vim_free(saved_line);
1496 vim_free(next_line);
1497 vim_free(allocated);
1498 return retval;
1499}
1500
1501#if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1502/*
1503 * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1504 * which introduces a comment. If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1505 * returned.
1506 * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1507 * comment leader.
1508 * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1509 */
1510 int
1511get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1512 char_u *line;
1513 char_u **flags;
1514 int backward;
1515{
1516 int i, j;
1517 int got_com = FALSE;
1518 int found_one;
1519 char_u part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* buffer for one option part */
1520 char_u *string; /* pointer to comment string */
1521 char_u *list;
1522
1523 i = 0;
1524 while (vim_iswhite(line[i])) /* leading white space is ignored */
1525 ++i;
1526
1527 /*
1528 * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1529 */
1530 while (line[i])
1531 {
1532 /*
1533 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1534 */
1535 found_one = FALSE;
1536 for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1537 {
1538 /*
1539 * Get one option part into part_buf[]. Advance list to next one.
1540 * put string at start of string.
1541 */
1542 if (!got_com && flags != NULL) /* remember where flags started */
1543 *flags = list;
1544 (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1545 string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1546 if (string == NULL) /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1547 continue;
1548 *string++ = NUL; /* isolate flags from string */
1549
1550 /*
1551 * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1552 * nested comments.
1553 */
1554 if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1555 continue;
1556
1557 /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1558 if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1559 continue;
1560
1561 /*
1562 * Line contents and string must match.
1563 * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1564 * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1565 * TABs and spaces).
1566 */
1567 if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1568 {
1569 if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1570 continue;
1571 while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1572 ++string;
1573 }
1574 for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1575 ;
1576 if (string[j] != NUL)
1577 continue;
1578
1579 /*
1580 * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1581 * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1582 */
1583 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1584 && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1585 continue;
1586
1587 /*
1588 * We have found a match, stop searching.
1589 */
1590 i += j;
1591 got_com = TRUE;
1592 found_one = TRUE;
1593 break;
1594 }
1595
1596 /*
1597 * No match found, stop scanning.
1598 */
1599 if (!found_one)
1600 break;
1601
1602 /*
1603 * Include any trailing white space.
1604 */
1605 while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1606 ++i;
1607
1608 /*
1609 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1610 */
1611 if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1612 break;
1613 }
1614 return (got_com ? i : 0);
1615}
1616#endif
1617
1618/*
1619 * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1620 */
1621 int
1622plines(lnum)
1623 linenr_T lnum;
1624{
1625 return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1626}
1627
1628 int
1629plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1630 win_T *wp;
1631 linenr_T lnum;
1632 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1633{
1634#if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1635 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1636 * is one line anyway. */
1637 return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1638}
1639
1640 int
1641plines_nofill(lnum)
1642 linenr_T lnum;
1643{
1644 return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1645}
1646
1647 int
1648plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1649 win_T *wp;
1650 linenr_T lnum;
1651 int winheight; /* when TRUE limit to window height */
1652{
1653#endif
1654 int lines;
1655
1656 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1657 return 1;
1658
1659#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1660 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1661 return 1;
1662#endif
1663
1664#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1665 /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1666 /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1667 if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1668 return 1;
1669#endif
1670
1671 lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1672 if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1673 return (int)wp->w_height;
1674 return lines;
1675}
1676
1677/*
1678 * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1679 * "wp". Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1680 */
1681 int
1682plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1683 win_T *wp;
1684 linenr_T lnum;
1685{
1686 char_u *s;
1687 long col;
1688 int width;
1689
1690 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1691 if (*s == NUL) /* empty line */
1692 return 1;
1693 col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1694
1695 /*
1696 * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1697 * extra column.
1698 */
1699 if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1700 col += 1;
1701
1702 /*
1703 * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1704 */
1705 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1706 if (width <= 0)
1707 return 32000;
1708 if (col <= width)
1709 return 1;
1710 col -= width;
1711 width += win_col_off2(wp);
1712 return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1713}
1714
1715/*
1716 * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1717 * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1718 */
1719 int
1720plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1721 win_T *wp;
1722 linenr_T lnum;
1723 long column;
1724{
1725 long col;
1726 char_u *s;
1727 int lines = 0;
1728 int width;
1729
1730#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1731 /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line. When folded the result
1732 * is one line anyway. */
1733 lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1734#endif
1735
1736 if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1737 return lines + 1;
1738
1739#ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1740 if (wp->w_width == 0)
1741 return lines + 1;
1742#endif
1743
1744 s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1745
1746 col = 0;
1747 while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1748 {
1749 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00001750 mb_ptr_adv(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00001751 }
1752
1753 /*
1754 * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1755 * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1756 * screen position of the TAB. This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1757 * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1758 * 'ts') -- webb.
1759 */
1760 if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1761 col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1762
1763 /*
1764 * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1765 */
1766 width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1767 if (width > 0)
1768 {
1769 lines += 1;
1770 if (col >= width)
1771 lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1772 if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1773 return lines;
1774 }
1775 return (int)(wp->w_height); /* maximum length */
1776}
1777
1778 int
1779plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1780 win_T *wp;
1781 linenr_T first, last;
1782{
1783 int count = 0;
1784
1785 while (first <= last)
1786 {
1787#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1788 int x;
1789
1790 /* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1791 * that are maybe folded. */
1792 x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1793 if (x > 0)
1794 {
1795 ++count; /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1796 first += x;
1797 }
1798 else
1799#endif
1800 {
1801#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1802 if (first == wp->w_topline)
1803 count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1804 else
1805#endif
1806 count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1807 ++first;
1808 }
1809 }
1810 return (count);
1811}
1812
1813#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1814/*
1815 * Insert string "p" at the cursor position. Stops at a NUL byte.
1816 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1817 */
1818 void
1819ins_bytes(p)
1820 char_u *p;
1821{
1822 ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1823}
1824#endif
1825
1826#if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1827 || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1828/*
1829 * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1830 * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1831 */
1832 void
1833ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1834 char_u *p;
1835 int len;
1836{
1837 int i;
1838# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1839 int n;
1840
1841 for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1842 {
1843 n = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p + i);
1844 ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1845 }
1846# else
1847 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1848 ins_char(p[i]);
1849# endif
1850}
1851#endif
1852
1853/*
1854 * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1855 * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1856 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1857 * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1858 * convert bytes to a character.
1859 */
1860 void
1861ins_char(c)
1862 int c;
1863{
1864#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1865 char_u buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1866 int n;
1867
1868 n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1869
1870 /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1871 * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1872 if (buf[0] == 0)
1873 buf[0] = '\n';
1874
1875 ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1876}
1877
1878 void
1879ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1880 char_u *buf;
1881 int charlen;
1882{
1883 int c = buf[0];
1884 int l, j;
1885#endif
1886 int newlen; /* nr of bytes inserted */
1887 int oldlen; /* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1888 char_u *p;
1889 char_u *newp;
1890 char_u *oldp;
1891 int linelen; /* length of old line including NUL */
1892 colnr_T col;
1893 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1894 int i;
1895
1896#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1897 /* Break tabs if needed. */
1898 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1899 coladvance_force(getviscol());
1900#endif
1901
1902 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1903 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1904 linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1905
1906 /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1907 oldlen = 0;
1908#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1909 newlen = charlen;
1910#else
1911 newlen = 1;
1912#endif
1913
1914 if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1915 {
1916#ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1917 if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1918 {
1919 colnr_T new_vcol = 0; /* init for GCC */
1920 colnr_T vcol;
1921 int old_list;
1922#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1923 char_u buf[2];
1924#endif
1925
1926 /*
1927 * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1928 * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1929 * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1930 */
1931 old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1932 if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1933 curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1934
1935 /*
1936 * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1937 * characters (zero if it's a TAB). Count the number of bytes to
1938 * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1939 * cells. May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1940 */
1941 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1942#ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1943 buf[0] = c;
1944 buf[1] = NUL;
1945#endif
1946 new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1947 while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1948 {
1949 vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1950 /* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1951 * position. */
1952 if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1953 break;
1954#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1955 oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + oldlen);
1956#else
1957 ++oldlen;
1958#endif
1959 /* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1960 if (vcol > new_vcol)
1961 newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1962 }
1963 curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1964 }
1965 else
1966#endif
1967 if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1968 {
1969 /* normal replace */
1970#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1971 oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col);
1972#else
1973 oldlen = 1;
1974#endif
1975 }
1976
1977
1978 /* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1979 * put back when BS is used. The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1980 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1981 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1982 replace_push(NUL);
1983 for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1984 {
1985#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1986 l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
1987 for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1988 replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1989 i += l;
1990#else
1991 replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1992#endif
1993 }
1994 }
1995
1996 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1997 if (newp == NULL)
1998 return;
1999
2000 /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2001 if (col > 0)
2002 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2003
2004 /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2005 p = newp + col;
2006 mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2007 (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2008
2009 /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2010#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2011 mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2012 i = charlen;
2013#else
2014 *p = c;
2015 i = 1;
2016#endif
2017
2018 /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2019 while (i < newlen)
2020 p[i++] = ' ';
2021
2022 /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2023 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2024
2025 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2026 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2027
2028 /*
2029 * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2030 * show the match for right parens and braces.
2031 */
2032 if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2033 && msg_silent == 0
2034#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2035 && charlen == 1
2036#endif
2037 )
2038 showmatch(c);
2039
2040#ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2041 if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2042#endif
2043 {
2044 /* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2045#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2046 curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2047#else
2048 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2049#endif
2050 }
2051 /*
2052 * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2053 */
2054}
2055
2056/*
2057 * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2058 * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2059 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2060 */
2061 void
2062ins_str(s)
2063 char_u *s;
2064{
2065 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2066 int newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2067 int oldlen;
2068 colnr_T col;
2069 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2070
2071#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2072 if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2073 coladvance_force(getviscol());
2074#endif
2075
2076 col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2077 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2078 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2079
2080 newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2081 if (newp == NULL)
2082 return;
2083 if (col > 0)
2084 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2085 mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2086 mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2087 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2088 changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2089 curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2090}
2091
2092/*
2093 * Delete one character under the cursor.
2094 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2095 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2096 *
2097 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2098 */
2099 int
2100del_char(fixpos)
2101 int fixpos;
2102{
2103#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2104 if (has_mbyte)
2105 {
2106 /* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2107 mb_adjust_cursor();
2108 if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2109 return FAIL;
2110 return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2111 }
2112#endif
2113 return del_bytes(1L, fixpos);
2114}
2115
2116#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2117/*
2118 * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2119 */
2120 int
2121del_chars(count, fixpos)
2122 long count;
2123 int fixpos;
2124{
2125 long bytes = 0;
2126 long i;
2127 char_u *p;
2128 int l;
2129
2130 p = ml_get_cursor();
2131 for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2132 {
2133 l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p);
2134 bytes += l;
2135 p += l;
2136 }
2137 return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos);
2138}
2139#endif
2140
2141/*
2142 * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2143 * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2144 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2145 *
2146 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2147 */
2148 int
2149del_bytes(count, fixpos)
2150 long count;
2151 int fixpos;
2152{
2153 char_u *oldp, *newp;
2154 colnr_T oldlen;
2155 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2156 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2157 int was_alloced;
2158 long movelen;
2159
2160 oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2161 oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2162
2163 /*
2164 * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2165 */
2166 if (col >= oldlen)
2167 return FAIL;
2168
2169#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2170 /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2171 * delete the last combining character. */
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00002172 if (p_deco && enc_utf8 && utfc_ptr2len_check(oldp + col) >= count)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002173 {
2174 int c1, c2;
2175 int n;
2176
2177 (void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2);
2178 if (c1 != NUL)
2179 {
2180 /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2181 n = col;
2182 do
2183 {
2184 col = n;
2185 count = utf_ptr2len_check(oldp + n);
2186 n += count;
2187 } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2188 fixpos = 0;
2189 }
2190 }
2191#endif
2192
2193 /*
2194 * When count is too big, reduce it.
2195 */
2196 movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2197 if (movelen <= 1)
2198 {
2199 /*
2200 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2201 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2202 */
2203 if (col > 0 && fixpos)
2204 {
2205 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2206#ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2207 curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2208#endif
2209#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2210 if (has_mbyte)
2211 curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2212 (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2213#endif
2214 }
2215 count = oldlen - col;
2216 movelen = 1;
2217 }
2218
2219 /*
2220 * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2221 * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2222 */
2223 was_alloced = ml_line_alloced(); /* check if oldp was allocated */
2224#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2225 if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2226 netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2227 /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2228#endif
2229 if (was_alloced)
2230 newp = oldp; /* use same allocated memory */
2231 else
2232 { /* need to allocate a new line */
2233 newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2234 if (newp == NULL)
2235 return FAIL;
2236 mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2237 }
2238 mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2239 if (!was_alloced)
2240 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2241
2242 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2243 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2244
2245 return OK;
2246}
2247
2248/*
2249 * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2250 * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2251 *
2252 * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2253 */
2254 int
2255truncate_line(fixpos)
2256 int fixpos; /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2257{
2258 char_u *newp;
2259 linenr_T lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2260 colnr_T col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2261
2262 if (col == 0)
2263 newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2264 else
2265 newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2266
2267 if (newp == NULL)
2268 return FAIL;
2269
2270 ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2271
2272 /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2273 changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2274
2275 /*
2276 * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2277 */
2278 if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2279 --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2280
2281 return OK;
2282}
2283
2284/*
2285 * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2286 * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2287 */
2288 void
2289del_lines(nlines, undo)
2290 long nlines; /* number of lines to delete */
2291 int undo; /* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2292{
2293 long n;
2294
2295 if (nlines <= 0)
2296 return;
2297
2298 /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2299 if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2300 return;
2301
2302 for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2303 {
2304 if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY) /* nothing to delete */
2305 break;
2306
2307 ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2308 ++n;
2309
2310 /* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2311 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2312 break;
2313 }
2314 /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2315 deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2316
2317 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2318 check_cursor_lnum();
2319}
2320
2321 int
2322gchar_pos(pos)
2323 pos_T *pos;
2324{
2325 char_u *ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2326
2327#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2328 if (has_mbyte)
2329 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2330#endif
2331 return (int)*ptr;
2332}
2333
2334 int
2335gchar_cursor()
2336{
2337#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2338 if (has_mbyte)
2339 return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2340#endif
2341 return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2342}
2343
2344/*
2345 * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2346 * It is directly written into the block.
2347 */
2348 void
2349pchar_cursor(c)
2350 int c;
2351{
2352 *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2353 + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2354}
2355
2356#if 0 /* not used */
2357/*
2358 * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2359 */
2360 void
2361goto_endofbuf(pos)
2362 pos_T *pos;
2363{
2364 char_u *p;
2365
2366 pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2367 pos->col = 0;
2368 p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2369 while (*p++)
2370 ++pos->col;
2371}
2372#endif
2373
2374/*
2375 * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2376 * non-blank in the line.
2377 * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2378 * the line.
2379 */
2380 int
2381inindent(extra)
2382 int extra;
2383{
2384 char_u *ptr;
2385 colnr_T col;
2386
2387 for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2388 ++ptr;
2389 if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2390 return TRUE;
2391 else
2392 return FALSE;
2393}
2394
2395/*
2396 * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2397 */
2398 char_u *
2399skip_to_option_part(p)
2400 char_u *p;
2401{
2402 if (*p == ',')
2403 ++p;
2404 while (*p == ' ')
2405 ++p;
2406 return p;
2407}
2408
2409/*
2410 * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2411 *
2412 * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2413 * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2414 */
2415 void
2416changed()
2417{
2418#if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2419 /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2420 * mean a change of the buffer yet. That is delayed until the
2421 * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2422 if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2423 return;
2424 xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2425#endif
2426
2427 if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2428 {
2429 int save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2430
2431 change_warning(0);
2432 /* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2433 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2434 if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2435#ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2436 && !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2437#endif
2438 )
2439 {
2440 ml_open_file(curbuf);
2441
2442 /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2443 * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2444 * message. Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2445 * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2446 if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2447 {
2448 out_flush();
2449 ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2450 wait_return(TRUE);
2451 msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2452 }
2453 }
2454 curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002455 ml_setflags(curbuf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002456#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2457 check_status(curbuf);
2458#endif
2459#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2460 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2461#endif
2462 }
2463 ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
2464 ++global_changedtick;
2465}
2466
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002467static void changedOneline __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum));
2468static void changed_lines_buf __ARGS((buf_T *buf, linenr_T lnum, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002469static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2470
2471/*
2472 * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2473 * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2474 * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2475 * - invalidates cached values
2476 */
2477 void
2478changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2479 linenr_T lnum;
2480 colnr_T col;
2481{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002482 changedOneline(curbuf, lnum);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002483 changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002484
2485#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2486 /* Diff highlighting in other diff windows may need to be updated too. */
2487 if (curwin->w_p_diff)
2488 {
2489 win_T *wp;
2490 linenr_T wlnum;
2491
2492 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2493 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2494 {
2495 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2496 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2497 if (wlnum > 0)
2498 changedOneline(wp->w_buffer, wlnum);
2499 }
2500 }
2501#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002502}
2503
2504 static void
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002505changedOneline(buf, lnum)
2506 buf_T *buf;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002507 linenr_T lnum;
2508{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002509 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002510 {
2511 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002512 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2513 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2514 else if (lnum >= buf->b_mod_bot)
2515 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002516 }
2517 else
2518 {
2519 /* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002520 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2521 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2522 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2523 buf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002524 }
2525}
2526
2527/*
2528 * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2529 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2530 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2531 */
2532 void
2533appended_lines(lnum, count)
2534 linenr_T lnum;
2535 long count;
2536{
2537 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2538}
2539
2540/*
2541 * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2542 */
2543 void
2544appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2545 linenr_T lnum;
2546 long count;
2547{
2548 mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2549 changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2550}
2551
2552/*
2553 * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2554 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2555 * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2556 */
2557 void
2558deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2559 linenr_T lnum;
2560 long count;
2561{
2562 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2563}
2564
2565/*
2566 * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2567 */
2568 void
2569deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2570 linenr_T lnum;
2571 long count;
2572{
2573 mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2574 changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2575}
2576
2577/*
2578 * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2579 * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2580 * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2581 * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2582 * - invalidate cached values
2583 * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2584 * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2585 * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2586 * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2587 */
2588 void
2589changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2590 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2591 colnr_T col; /* column in first line with change */
2592 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2593 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2594{
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002595 changed_lines_buf(curbuf, lnum, lnume, xtra);
2596
2597#ifdef FEAT_DIFF
2598 if (xtra == 0 && curwin->w_p_diff)
2599 {
2600 /* When the number of lines doesn't change then mark_adjust() isn't
2601 * called and other diff buffers still need to be marked for
2602 * displaying. */
2603 win_T *wp;
2604 linenr_T wlnum;
2605
2606 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2607 if (wp->w_p_diff && wp != curwin)
2608 {
2609 redraw_win_later(wp, VALID);
2610 wlnum = diff_lnum_win(lnum, wp);
2611 if (wlnum > 0)
2612 changed_lines_buf(wp->w_buffer, wlnum,
2613 lnume - lnum + wlnum, 0L);
2614 }
2615 }
2616#endif
2617
2618 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2619}
2620
2621 static void
2622changed_lines_buf(buf, lnum, lnume, xtra)
2623 buf_T *buf;
2624 linenr_T lnum; /* first line with change */
2625 linenr_T lnume; /* line below last changed line */
2626 long xtra; /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2627{
2628 if (buf->b_mod_set)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002629 {
2630 /* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002631 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_top)
2632 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2633 if (lnum < buf->b_mod_bot)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002634 {
2635 /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002636 buf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2637 if (buf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2638 buf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002639 }
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002640 if (lnume + xtra > buf->b_mod_bot)
2641 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2642 buf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002643 }
2644 else
2645 {
2646 /* set the area that must be redisplayed */
Bram Moolenaardba8a912005-04-24 22:08:39 +00002647 buf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2648 buf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2649 buf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2650 buf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002651 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002652}
2653
2654 static void
2655changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2656 linenr_T lnum;
2657 colnr_T col;
2658 linenr_T lnume;
2659 long xtra;
2660{
2661 win_T *wp;
2662 int i;
2663#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2664 int cols;
2665 pos_T *p;
2666 int add;
2667#endif
2668
2669 /* mark the buffer as modified */
2670 changed();
2671
2672 /* set the '. mark */
2673 if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2674 {
2675 curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2676 curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2677
2678#ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2679 /* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2680 * don't have an entry yet. */
2681 if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2682 {
2683 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2684 add = TRUE;
2685 else
2686 {
2687 /* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2688 * as the last one and the column is not too far away. Avoids
2689 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2690 p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2691 if (p->lnum != lnum)
2692 add = TRUE;
2693 else
2694 {
2695 cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2696 if (cols == 0)
2697 cols = 79;
2698 add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2699 }
2700 }
2701 if (add)
2702 {
2703 /* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2704 * and it's at some distance of the last change. Use a new
2705 * position in the changelist. */
2706 curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2707
2708 if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2709 {
2710 /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2711 curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2712 mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2713 sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2714 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2715 {
2716 /* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2717 * this buffer. */
2718 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2719 --wp->w_changelistidx;
2720 }
2721 }
2722 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2723 {
2724 /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2725 * at the end it stays at the end. */
2726 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2727 && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2728 ++wp->w_changelistidx;
2729 }
2730 ++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2731 }
2732 }
2733 curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2734 curbuf->b_last_change;
2735 /* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2736 * takes you back to it. */
2737 curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2738#endif
2739 }
2740
2741 FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2742 {
2743 if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2744 {
2745 /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2746 if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2747 wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2748
2749 /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2750 * values for the cursor. */
2751#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2752 /*
2753 * Update the folds for this window. Can't postpone this, because
2754 * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2755 */
2756 foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2757
2758 /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2759 * included in a fold. Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2760 * might be displayed differently.
2761 * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2762 * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2763 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2764 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2765 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2766 i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2767 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2768 wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2769
2770 /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2771 * compare with the first line in that range. */
2772 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2773 {
2774 i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2775 if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2776 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2777 }
2778#endif
2779
2780 if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2781 changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2782 else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2783 changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2784 if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2785 {
2786 /* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2787 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2788 approximate_botline_win(wp);
2789 }
2790
2791 /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2792 * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2793 * inserted/deleted lines. Makes it possible to stop displaying
2794 * after the change. */
2795 for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2796 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2797 {
2798 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2799 {
2800 if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2801 {
2802 /* line included in change */
2803 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2804 }
2805 else if (xtra != 0)
2806 {
2807 /* line below change */
2808 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2809#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2810 wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2811#endif
2812 }
2813 }
2814#ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2815 else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2816 {
2817 /* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2818 * may need to be redrawn */
2819 wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2820 }
2821#endif
2822 }
2823 }
2824 }
2825
2826 /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2827 * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2828 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2829 must_redraw = VALID;
2830}
2831
2832/*
2833 * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2834 */
2835 void
2836unchanged(buf, ff)
2837 buf_T *buf;
2838 int ff; /* also reset 'fileformat' */
2839{
2840 if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2841 {
2842 buf->b_changed = 0;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00002843 ml_setflags(buf);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002844 if (ff)
2845 save_file_ff(buf);
2846#ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2847 check_status(buf);
2848#endif
2849#ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2850 need_maketitle = TRUE; /* set window title later */
2851#endif
2852 }
2853 ++buf->b_changedtick;
2854 ++global_changedtick;
2855#ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2856 netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2857#endif
2858}
2859
2860#if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2861/*
2862 * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2863 * need to be updated
2864 */
2865 void
2866check_status(buf)
2867 buf_T *buf;
2868{
2869 win_T *wp;
2870
2871 for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2872 if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2873 {
2874 wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2875 if (must_redraw < VALID)
2876 must_redraw = VALID;
2877 }
2878}
2879#endif
2880
2881/*
2882 * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2883 * Don't do this for autocommands.
2884 * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2885 * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but b_did_warn
2886 * will be TRUE.
2887 */
2888 void
2889change_warning(col)
2890 int col; /* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2891 mode and 'showmode' is on */
2892{
2893 if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2894 && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2895#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2896 && !autocmd_busy
2897#endif
2898 && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2899 {
2900#ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2901 apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2902 if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2903 return;
2904#endif
2905 /*
2906 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2907 * be after the mode message.
2908 */
2909 msg_start();
2910 if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2911 msg_col = col;
Bram Moolenaar2df6dcc2004-07-12 15:53:54 +00002912 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00002913 MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2914 hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2915 msg_clr_eos();
2916 (void)msg_end();
2917 if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2918 {
2919 out_flush();
2920 ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2921 }
2922 curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2923 redraw_cmdline = FALSE; /* don't redraw and erase the message */
2924 if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2925 showmode();
2926 }
2927}
2928
2929/*
2930 * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2931 * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2932 * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2933 * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2934 * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2935 *
2936 * return the 'y' or 'n'
2937 */
2938 int
2939ask_yesno(str, direct)
2940 char_u *str;
2941 int direct;
2942{
2943 int r = ' ';
2944 int save_State = State;
2945
2946 if (exiting) /* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2947 settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2948 ++no_wait_return;
2949#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2950 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
2951#endif
2952 State = CONFIRM; /* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2953#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2954 setmouse(); /* disables mouse for xterm */
2955#endif
2956 ++no_mapping;
2957 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2958
2959 while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2960 {
2961 /* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2962 smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2963 if (direct)
2964 r = get_keystroke();
2965 else
2966 r = safe_vgetc();
2967 if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2968 r = 'n';
2969 msg_putchar(r); /* show what you typed */
2970 out_flush();
2971 }
2972 --no_wait_return;
2973 State = save_State;
2974#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2975 setmouse();
2976#endif
2977 --no_mapping;
2978 --allow_keys;
2979
2980 return r;
2981}
2982
2983/*
2984 * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
2985 * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
2986 * button (used at the more prompt).
2987 * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
2988 * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
2989 * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
2990 */
2991 int
2992get_keystroke()
2993{
2994#define CBUFLEN 151
2995 char_u buf[CBUFLEN];
2996 int len = 0;
2997 int n;
2998 int save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
2999
3000 mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE; /* mappings are not used here */
3001 for (;;)
3002 {
3003 cursor_on();
3004 out_flush();
3005
3006 /* First time: blocking wait. Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
3007 * terminal code to complete. Leave some room for check_termcode() to
3008 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL). And
3009 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
3010 n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
3011 len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
3012 if (n > 0)
3013 {
3014 /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
3015 n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
3016 len += n;
3017 }
3018
3019 /* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
3020 if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
3021 continue;
3022 /* found a termcode: adjust length */
3023 if (n > 0)
3024 len = n;
3025 if (len == 0) /* nothing typed yet */
3026 continue;
3027
3028 /* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
3029 n = buf[0];
3030 if (n == K_SPECIAL)
3031 {
3032 n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
3033 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
3034 || n == K_IGNORE
3035#ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
3036 || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
3037 || n == K_LEFTDRAG
3038 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
3039 || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
3040 || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
3041 || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
3042 || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
3043 || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
3044 || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
3045 || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
3046 || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
3047 || n == K_MOUSEUP
3048 || n == K_X1MOUSE
3049 || n == K_X1DRAG
3050 || n == K_X1RELEASE
3051 || n == K_X2MOUSE
3052 || n == K_X2DRAG
3053 || n == K_X2RELEASE
3054# ifdef FEAT_GUI
3055 || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3056 || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3057# endif
3058#endif
3059 )
3060 {
3061 if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3062 mod_mask = buf[2];
3063 len -= 3;
3064 if (len > 0)
3065 mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3066 continue;
3067 }
3068 }
3069#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3070 if (has_mbyte)
3071 {
3072 if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3073 continue; /* more bytes to get */
3074 buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3075 n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3076 }
3077#endif
3078#ifdef UNIX
3079 if (n == intr_char)
3080 n = ESC;
3081#endif
3082 break;
3083 }
3084
3085 mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3086 return n;
3087}
3088
3089/*
3090 * get a number from the user
3091 */
3092 int
3093get_number(colon)
3094 int colon; /* allow colon to abort */
3095{
3096 int n = 0;
3097 int c;
3098
3099 /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3100 * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3101 if (msg_silent != 0)
3102 return 0;
3103
3104#ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3105 dont_scroll = TRUE; /* disallow scrolling here */
3106#endif
3107 ++no_mapping;
3108 ++allow_keys; /* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3109 for (;;)
3110 {
3111 windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3112 c = safe_vgetc();
3113 if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3114 {
3115 n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3116 msg_putchar(c);
3117 }
3118 else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3119 {
3120 n /= 10;
3121 MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3122 }
3123 else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3124 {
3125 stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3126 if (!exmode_active)
3127 cmdline_row = msg_row;
3128 skip_redraw = TRUE; /* skip redraw once */
3129 do_redraw = FALSE;
3130 break;
3131 }
3132 else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3133 break;
3134 }
3135 --no_mapping;
3136 --allow_keys;
3137 return n;
3138}
3139
Bram Moolenaar9ba0eb82005-06-13 22:28:56 +00003140/*
3141 * Ask the user to enter a number.
3142 */
3143 int
3144prompt_for_number()
3145{
3146 int i;
3147
3148 /* When using ":silent" assume that <CR> was entered. */
3149 MSG_PUTS(_("Choice number (<Enter> cancels): "));
3150 i = get_number(TRUE);
3151 if (KeyTyped) /* don't call wait_return() now */
3152 {
3153 msg_putchar('\n');
3154 cmdline_row = msg_row - 1;
3155 need_wait_return = FALSE;
3156 msg_didany = FALSE;
3157 }
3158 return i;
3159}
3160
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003161 void
3162msgmore(n)
3163 long n;
3164{
3165 long pn;
3166
3167 if (global_busy /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003168 || !messaging()) /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3169 return;
3170
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003171 /* We don't want to overwrite another important message, but do overwrite
3172 * a previous "more lines" or "fewer lines" message, so that "5dd" and
3173 * then "put" reports the last action. */
3174 if (keep_msg != NULL && !keep_msg_more)
3175 return;
3176
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003177 if (n > 0)
3178 pn = n;
3179 else
3180 pn = -n;
3181
3182 if (pn > p_report)
3183 {
3184 if (pn == 1)
3185 {
3186 if (n > 0)
3187 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3188 else
3189 STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3190 }
3191 else
3192 {
3193 if (n > 0)
3194 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3195 else
3196 sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3197 }
3198 if (got_int)
3199 STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3200 if (msg(msg_buf))
3201 {
3202 set_keep_msg(msg_buf);
3203 keep_msg_attr = 0;
Bram Moolenaar7df2d662005-01-25 22:18:08 +00003204 keep_msg_more = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003205 }
3206 }
3207}
3208
3209/*
3210 * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3211 */
3212 void
3213beep_flush()
3214{
3215 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3216 {
3217 flush_buffers(FALSE);
3218 vim_beep();
3219 }
3220}
3221
3222/*
3223 * give a warning for an error
3224 */
3225 void
3226vim_beep()
3227{
3228 if (emsg_silent == 0)
3229 {
3230 if (p_vb
3231#ifdef FEAT_GUI
3232 /* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3233 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3234 && !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3235#endif
3236 )
3237 {
3238 out_str(T_VB);
3239 }
3240 else
3241 {
3242#ifdef MSDOS
3243 /*
3244 * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3245 * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3246 * where the beeps don't overlap.
3247 */
3248 if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3249 {
3250 out_char(BELL);
3251 beep_count = 1;
3252 }
3253 else
3254 ++beep_count;
3255#else
3256 out_char(BELL);
3257#endif
3258 }
Bram Moolenaar5313dcb2005-02-22 08:56:13 +00003259
3260 /* When 'verbose' is set and we are sourcing a script or executing a
3261 * function give the user a hint where the beep comes from. */
3262 if (vim_strchr(p_debug, 'e') != NULL)
3263 {
3264 msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
3265 msg_attr((char_u *)_("Beep!"), hl_attr(HLF_W));
3266 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003267 }
3268}
3269
3270/*
3271 * To get the "real" home directory:
3272 * - get value of $HOME
3273 * For Unix:
3274 * - go to that directory
3275 * - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3276 * This also works with mounts and links.
3277 * Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3278 */
3279static char_u *homedir = NULL;
3280
3281 void
3282init_homedir()
3283{
3284 char_u *var;
3285
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003286 /* In case we are called a second time (when 'encoding' changes). */
3287 vim_free(homedir);
3288 homedir = NULL;
3289
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003290#ifdef VMS
3291 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3292#else
3293 var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3294#endif
3295
3296 if (var != NULL && *var == NUL) /* empty is same as not set */
3297 var = NULL;
3298
3299#ifdef WIN3264
3300 /*
3301 * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3302 * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%". Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3303 * when $HOME is being set.
3304 */
3305 if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3306 {
3307 char_u *p;
3308 char_u *exp;
3309
3310 p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3311 if (p != NULL)
3312 {
3313 STRNCPY(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3314 NameBuff[p - (var + 1)] = NUL;
3315 exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3316 if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3317 && STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3318 {
Bram Moolenaar555b2802005-05-19 21:08:39 +00003319 vim_snprintf((char *)NameBuff, MAXPATHL, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003320 var = NameBuff;
3321 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3322 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3323 }
3324 }
3325 }
3326
3327 /*
3328 * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3329 * specifically defined it for Vim's sake. However, on Windows NT
3330 * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3331 * each user. Try constructing $HOME from these.
3332 */
3333 if (var == NULL)
3334 {
3335 char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3336
3337 homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3338 homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3339 if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3340 && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3341 {
3342 sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3343 if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3344 {
3345 var = NameBuff;
3346 /* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3347 vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3348 }
3349 }
3350 }
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003351
3352# if defined(FEAT_MBYTE)
3353 if (enc_utf8 && var != NULL)
3354 {
3355 int len;
3356 char_u *pp;
3357
3358 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3359 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3360 acp_to_enc(var, STRLEN(var), &pp, &len);
3361 if (pp != NULL)
3362 {
3363 homedir = pp;
3364 return;
3365 }
3366 }
3367# endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003368#endif
3369
3370#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3371 /*
3372 * Default home dir is C:/
3373 * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3374 */
3375 if (var == NULL)
3376 var = "C:/";
3377#endif
3378 if (var != NULL)
3379 {
3380#ifdef UNIX
3381 /*
3382 * Change to the directory and get the actual path. This resolves
3383 * links. Don't do it when we can't return.
3384 */
3385 if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3386 && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3387 {
3388 if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3389 var = IObuff;
3390 if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3391 EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3392 }
3393#endif
3394 homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3395 }
3396}
3397
3398/*
3399 * Expand environment variable with path name.
3400 * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME. For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3401 * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3402 * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3403 */
3404 void
3405expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3406 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3407 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3408 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3409{
3410 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE);
3411}
3412
3413 void
3414expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, esc)
3415 char_u *src; /* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3416 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
3417 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
3418 int esc; /* escape spaces in expanded variables */
3419{
3420 char_u *tail;
3421 int c;
3422 char_u *var;
3423 int copy_char;
3424 int mustfree; /* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3425 int at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
3426
3427 src = skipwhite(src);
3428 --dstlen; /* leave one char space for "\," */
3429 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3430 {
3431 copy_char = TRUE;
Bram Moolenaard4755bb2004-09-02 19:12:26 +00003432 if ((*src == '$'
3433#ifdef VMS
3434 && at_start
3435#endif
3436 )
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003437#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3438 || *src == '%'
3439#endif
3440 || (*src == '~' && at_start))
3441 {
3442 mustfree = FALSE;
3443
3444 /*
3445 * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3446 * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3447 */
3448 if (*src != '~') /* environment var */
3449 {
3450 tail = src + 1;
3451 var = dst;
3452 c = dstlen - 1;
3453
3454#ifdef UNIX
3455 /* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3456 if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3457 {
3458 tail++; /* ignore '{' */
3459 while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3460 *var++ = *tail++;
3461 }
3462 else
3463#endif
3464 {
3465 while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3466#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3467 || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3468#endif
3469 ))
3470 {
3471#ifdef OS2 /* env vars only in uppercase */
3472 *var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3473 tail++; /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3474#else
3475 *var++ = *tail++;
3476#endif
3477 }
3478 }
3479
3480#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3481# ifdef UNIX
3482 if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3483# else
3484 if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3485# endif
3486 var = NULL;
3487 else
3488 {
3489# ifdef UNIX
3490 if (src[1] == '{')
3491# else
3492 if (*src == '%')
3493#endif
3494 ++tail;
3495#endif
3496 *var = NUL;
3497 var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3498#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3499 }
3500#endif
3501 }
3502 /* home directory */
3503 else if ( src[1] == NUL
3504 || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3505 || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3506 {
3507 var = homedir;
3508 tail = src + 1;
3509 }
3510 else /* user directory */
3511 {
3512#if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3513 /*
3514 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3515 */
3516 tail = src;
3517 var = dst;
3518 c = dstlen - 1;
3519 while ( c-- > 0
3520 && *tail
3521 && vim_isfilec(*tail)
3522 && !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3523 *var++ = *tail++;
3524 *var = NUL;
3525# ifdef UNIX
3526 /*
3527 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3528 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3529 * expand ~user. This is slower and may fail if the shell
3530 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3531 */
3532# if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3533 {
3534 struct passwd *pw;
3535
3536 pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3537 if (pw != NULL)
3538 var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3539 else
3540 var = NULL;
3541 }
3542 if (var == NULL)
3543# endif
3544 {
3545 expand_T xpc;
3546
3547 ExpandInit(&xpc);
3548 xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3549 var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3550 WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3551 ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3552 mustfree = TRUE;
3553 }
3554
3555# else /* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3556 /*
3557 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3558 * directories to search for the user account in.
3559 */
3560 {
3561 char_u test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3562 char_u *path, *next_path, *ptr;
3563 struct stat st;
3564
3565 STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3566 next_path = paths;
3567 while (*next_path)
3568 {
3569 for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3570 next_path++);
3571 if (*next_path)
3572 *next_path++ = NUL;
3573 STRCPY(test, path);
3574 STRCAT(test, "/");
3575 STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3576 if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3577 {
3578 var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3579 STRCPY(var, test);
3580 mustfree = TRUE;
3581 break;
3582 }
3583 }
3584 }
3585# endif /* UNIX */
3586#else
3587 /* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3588 var = NULL;
3589 tail = (char_u *)""; /* for gcc */
3590#endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3591 }
3592
3593#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3594 /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3595 * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3596 if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3597 {
3598 char_u *p = vim_strsave(var);
3599
3600 if (p != NULL)
3601 {
3602 if (mustfree)
3603 vim_free(var);
3604 var = p;
3605 mustfree = TRUE;
3606 forward_slash(var);
3607 }
3608 }
3609#endif
3610
3611 /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3612 * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3613 if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3614 {
3615 char_u *p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3616
3617 if (p != NULL)
3618 {
3619 if (mustfree)
3620 vim_free(var);
3621 var = p;
3622 mustfree = TRUE;
3623 }
3624 }
3625
3626 if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3627 && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3628 {
3629 STRCPY(dst, var);
3630 dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003631 c = STRLEN(var);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003632 /* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3633 * with it, skip a character */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003634 if (*var != NUL && after_pathsep(dst, dst + c)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003635#if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3636 && dst[-1] != ':'
3637#endif
3638 && vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3639 ++tail;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003640 dst += c;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003641 src = tail;
3642 copy_char = FALSE;
3643 }
3644 if (mustfree)
3645 vim_free(var);
3646 }
3647
3648 if (copy_char) /* copy at least one char */
3649 {
3650 /*
3651 * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3652 */
3653 at_start = FALSE;
3654 if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3655 {
3656 *dst++ = *src++;
3657 --dstlen;
3658 }
3659 else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3660 at_start = TRUE;
3661 *dst++ = *src++;
3662 --dstlen;
3663 }
3664 }
3665 *dst = NUL;
3666}
3667
3668/*
3669 * Vim's version of getenv().
3670 * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
Bram Moolenaar2f6b0b82005-03-08 22:43:10 +00003671 * Also does ACP to 'enc' conversion for Win32.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003672 */
3673 char_u *
3674vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3675 char_u *name;
3676 int *mustfree; /* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3677{
3678 char_u *p;
3679 char_u *pend;
3680 int vimruntime;
3681
3682#if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3683 /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3684 if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3685 return homedir;
3686#endif
3687
3688 p = mch_getenv(name);
3689 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3690 p = NULL;
3691
3692 if (p != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003693 {
3694#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3695 if (enc_utf8)
3696 {
3697 int len;
3698 char_u *pp;
3699
3700 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions are
3701 * not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII characters. */
3702 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3703 if (pp != NULL)
3704 {
3705 p = pp;
3706 *mustfree = TRUE;
3707 }
3708 }
3709#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003710 return p;
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003711 }
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003712
3713 vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3714 if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3715 return NULL;
3716
3717 /*
3718 * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3719 * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3720 */
3721 if (vimruntime
3722#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3723 && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3724#endif
3725 )
3726 {
3727 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3728 if (p != NULL && *p == NUL) /* empty is the same as not set */
3729 p = NULL;
3730 if (p != NULL)
3731 {
3732 p = vim_version_dir(p);
3733 if (p != NULL)
3734 *mustfree = TRUE;
3735 else
3736 p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
Bram Moolenaar05159a02005-02-26 23:04:13 +00003737
3738#if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) && defined(WIN3264)
3739 if (enc_utf8)
3740 {
3741 int len;
3742 char_u *pp;
3743
3744 /* Convert from active codepage to UTF-8. Other conversions
3745 * are not done, because they would fail for non-ASCII
3746 * characters. */
3747 acp_to_enc(p, STRLEN(p), &pp, &len);
3748 if (pp != NULL)
3749 {
3750 if (mustfree)
3751 vim_free(p);
3752 p = pp;
3753 *mustfree = TRUE;
3754 }
3755 }
3756#endif
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003757 }
3758 }
3759
3760 /*
3761 * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3762 * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3763 * - the executable name from argv[0]
3764 */
3765 if (p == NULL)
3766 {
3767 if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3768 p = p_hf;
3769#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3770 /*
3771 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3772 */
3773 else
3774 p = exe_name;
3775#endif
3776 if (p != NULL)
3777 {
3778 /* remove the file name */
3779 pend = gettail(p);
3780
3781 /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3782 if (p == p_hf)
3783 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3784
3785#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3786# ifdef MACOS_X
3787 /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */
3788 if (p == exe_name)
3789 {
3790 char_u *pend1;
3791 char_u *pend2;
3792
3793 pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS");
3794 pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app");
3795 pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build");
3796 /* When runnig from project builder get rid of the
3797 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */
3798 if (pend2 == pend)
3799 pend = pend1;
3800 }
3801# endif
3802 /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3803 if (p == exe_name)
3804 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3805#endif
3806
3807 /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3808 if (!vimruntime)
3809 {
3810 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3811 pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3812 }
3813
3814 /* remove trailing path separator */
3815#ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3816 /* With MacOS path (with colons) the final colon is required */
3817 /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003818 if (pend > p && after_pathsep(p, pend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003819 --pend;
3820#endif
3821
3822 /* check that the result is a directory name */
3823 p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3824
3825 if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3826 {
3827 vim_free(p);
3828 p = NULL;
3829 }
3830 else
3831 {
3832#ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3833 /* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3834 if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3835 {
3836 vim_free(p);
3837 p = pend;
3838 }
3839#endif
3840 *mustfree = TRUE;
3841 }
3842 }
3843 }
3844
3845#ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3846 /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3847 * default_vimruntime_dir */
3848 if (p == NULL)
3849 {
3850 /* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3851 if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3852 {
3853 p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3854 *mustfree = FALSE;
3855 }
3856 else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3857 {
3858 if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3859 *mustfree = TRUE;
3860 else
3861 {
3862 p = default_vim_dir;
3863 *mustfree = FALSE;
3864 }
3865 }
3866 }
3867#endif
3868
3869 /*
3870 * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3871 * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3872 */
3873 if (p != NULL)
3874 {
3875 if (vimruntime)
3876 {
3877 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3878 didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3879#ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3880 {
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00003881 char_u *buf = concat_str(p, (char_u *)"/lang");
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003882
3883 if (buf != NULL)
3884 {
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003885 bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3886 vim_free(buf);
3887 }
3888 }
3889#endif
3890 }
3891 else
3892 {
3893 vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3894 didset_vim = TRUE;
3895 }
3896 }
3897 return p;
3898}
3899
3900/*
3901 * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3902 * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3903 */
3904 static char_u *
3905vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3906 char_u *vimdir;
3907{
3908 char_u *p;
3909
3910 if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3911 return NULL;
3912 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3913 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3914 return p;
3915 vim_free(p);
3916 p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3917 if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3918 return p;
3919 vim_free(p);
3920 return NULL;
3921}
3922
3923/*
3924 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
3925 * the length of "name/". Otherwise return "pend".
3926 */
3927 static char_u *
3928remove_tail(p, pend, name)
3929 char_u *p;
3930 char_u *pend;
3931 char_u *name;
3932{
3933 int len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
3934 char_u *newend = pend - len;
3935
3936 if (newend >= p
3937 && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00003938 && (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003939 return newend;
3940 return pend;
3941}
3942
3943#if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
3944/*
3945 * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend"
3946 * minus the length of "???.ext/". Otherwise return "pend".
3947 */
3948 static char_u *
3949remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext)
3950 char_u *p;
3951 char_u *pend;
3952 char_u *ext;
3953{
3954 int len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1;
3955 char_u *newend = pend - len;
3956
3957 if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0)
Bram Moolenaar86b68352004-12-27 21:59:20 +00003958 while (newend > p && !after_pathsep(p, newend))
3959 mb_ptr_back(p, newend);
3960 if (newend == p || after_pathsep(p, newend))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00003961 return newend;
3962 return pend;
3963}
3964#endif
3965
3966/*
3967 * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
3968 * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
3969 * again soon.
3970 */
3971 char_u *
3972expand_env_save(src)
3973 char_u *src;
3974{
3975 char_u *p;
3976
3977 p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
3978 if (p != NULL)
3979 expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
3980 return p;
3981}
3982
3983/*
3984 * Our portable version of setenv.
3985 */
3986 void
3987vim_setenv(name, val)
3988 char_u *name;
3989 char_u *val;
3990{
3991#ifdef HAVE_SETENV
3992 mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
3993#else
3994 char_u *envbuf;
3995
3996 /*
3997 * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
3998 * valid. The allocated memory will never be freed.
3999 */
4000 envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
4001 if (envbuf != NULL)
4002 {
4003 sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
4004 putenv((char *)envbuf);
4005 }
4006#endif
4007}
4008
4009#if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
4010/*
4011 * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
4012 */
4013/*ARGSUSED*/
4014 char_u *
4015get_env_name(xp, idx)
4016 expand_T *xp;
4017 int idx;
4018{
4019# if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
4020 /*
4021 * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
4022 */
4023 return NULL;
4024# else
4025# ifndef __WIN32__
4026 /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
4027 extern char **environ;
4028# endif
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004029# define ENVNAMELEN 100
4030 static char_u name[ENVNAMELEN];
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004031 char_u *str;
4032 int n;
4033
4034 str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
4035 if (str == NULL)
4036 return NULL;
4037
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00004038 for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004039 {
4040 if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
4041 break;
4042 name[n] = str[n];
4043 }
4044 name[n] = NUL;
4045 return name;
4046# endif
4047}
4048#endif
4049
4050/*
4051 * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
4052 * 'src'.
4053 * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
4054 */
4055 void
4056home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
4057 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4058 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4059 char_u *dst; /* where to put the result */
4060 int dstlen; /* maximum length of the result */
4061 int one; /* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
4062 spaces and commas in the file name. */
4063{
4064 size_t dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
4065 size_t len;
4066 char_u *homedir_env;
4067 char_u *p;
4068
4069 if (src == NULL)
4070 {
4071 *dst = NUL;
4072 return;
4073 }
4074
4075 /*
4076 * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
4077 */
4078 if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
4079 {
4080 STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
4081 return;
4082 }
4083
4084 /*
4085 * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
4086 * "real" home directory.
4087 */
4088 if (homedir != NULL)
4089 dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
4090
4091#ifdef VMS
4092 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
4093#else
4094 homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
4095#endif
4096
4097 if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
4098 homedir_env = NULL;
4099 if (homedir_env != NULL)
4100 envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
4101
4102 if (!one)
4103 src = skipwhite(src);
4104 while (*src && dstlen > 0)
4105 {
4106 /*
4107 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
4108 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
4109 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
4110 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
4111 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
4112 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
4113 * er's home directory)).
4114 */
4115 p = homedir;
4116 len = dirlen;
4117 for (;;)
4118 {
4119 if ( len
4120 && fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
4121 && (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
4122 || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
4123 || src[len] == NUL))
4124 {
4125 src += len;
4126 if (--dstlen > 0)
4127 *dst++ = '~';
4128
4129 /*
4130 * If it's just the home directory, add "/".
4131 */
4132 if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
4133 *dst++ = '/';
4134 break;
4135 }
4136 if (p == homedir_env)
4137 break;
4138 p = homedir_env;
4139 len = envlen;
4140 }
4141
4142 /* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
4143 while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
4144 *dst++ = *src++;
4145 /* skip separator */
4146 while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
4147 *dst++ = *src++;
4148 }
4149 /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4150
4151 *dst = NUL;
4152}
4153
4154/*
4155 * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4156 * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4157 */
4158 char_u *
4159home_replace_save(buf, src)
4160 buf_T *buf; /* when not NULL, check for help files */
4161 char_u *src; /* input file name */
4162{
4163 char_u *dst;
4164 unsigned len;
4165
4166 len = 3; /* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4167 if (src != NULL) /* just in case */
4168 len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4169 dst = alloc(len);
4170 if (dst != NULL)
4171 home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4172 return dst;
4173}
4174
4175/*
4176 * Compare two file names and return:
4177 * FPC_SAME if they both exist and are the same file.
4178 * FPC_SAMEX if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4179 * FPC_DIFF if they both exist and are different files.
4180 * FPC_NOTX if they both don't exist.
4181 * FPC_DIFFX if one of them doesn't exist.
4182 * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4183 */
4184 int
4185fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4186 char_u *s1, *s2;
4187 int checkname; /* when both don't exist, check file names */
4188{
4189#ifdef UNIX
4190 char_u exp1[MAXPATHL];
4191 char_u full1[MAXPATHL];
4192 char_u full2[MAXPATHL];
4193 struct stat st1, st2;
4194 int r1, r2;
4195
4196 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4197 r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4198 r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4199 if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4200 {
4201 /* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4202 if (checkname)
4203 {
4204 if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4205 return FPC_SAMEX;
4206 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4207 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4208 if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4209 return FPC_SAMEX;
4210 }
4211 return FPC_NOTX;
4212 }
4213 if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4214 return FPC_DIFFX;
4215 if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4216 return FPC_SAME;
4217 return FPC_DIFF;
4218#else
4219 char_u *exp1; /* expanded s1 */
4220 char_u *full1; /* full path of s1 */
4221 char_u *full2; /* full path of s2 */
4222 int retval = FPC_DIFF;
4223 int r1, r2;
4224
4225 /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4226 if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4227 {
4228 full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4229 full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4230
4231 expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4232 r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4233 r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4234
4235 /* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4236 if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4237 {
4238 if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4239 retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4240 else
4241 retval = FPC_NOTX;
4242 }
4243 else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4244 retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4245 else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4246 retval = FPC_DIFF;
4247 else
4248 retval = FPC_SAME;
4249 vim_free(exp1);
4250 }
4251 return retval;
4252#endif
4253}
4254
4255/*
Bram Moolenaarf4b8e572004-06-24 15:53:16 +00004256 * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4257 * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004258 */
4259 char_u *
4260gettail(fname)
4261 char_u *fname;
4262{
4263 char_u *p1, *p2;
4264
4265 if (fname == NULL)
4266 return (char_u *)"";
4267 for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; ) /* find last part of path */
4268 {
4269 if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4270 p1 = p2 + 1;
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004271 mb_ptr_adv(p2);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004272 }
4273 return p1;
4274}
4275
4276/*
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004277 * Get pointer to tail of "fname", including path separators. Putting a NUL
4278 * here leaves the directory name. Takes care of "c:/" and "//".
4279 * Always returns a valid pointer.
4280 */
4281 char_u *
4282gettail_sep(fname)
4283 char_u *fname;
4284{
4285 char_u *p;
4286 char_u *t;
4287
4288 p = get_past_head(fname); /* don't remove the '/' from "c:/file" */
4289 t = gettail(fname);
4290 while (t > p && after_pathsep(fname, t))
4291 --t;
4292#ifdef VMS
4293 /* path separator is part of the path */
4294 ++t;
4295#endif
4296 return t;
4297}
4298
4299/*
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004300 * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4301 */
4302 char_u *
4303getnextcomp(fname)
4304 char_u *fname;
4305{
4306 while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004307 mb_ptr_adv(fname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004308 if (*fname)
4309 ++fname;
4310 return fname;
4311}
4312
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004313/*
4314 * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4315 * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4316 * If there is no head, path is returned.
4317 */
4318 char_u *
4319get_past_head(path)
4320 char_u *path;
4321{
4322 char_u *retval;
4323
4324#if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4325 /* may skip "c:" */
4326 if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4327 retval = path + 2;
4328 else
4329 retval = path;
4330#else
4331# if defined(AMIGA)
4332 /* may skip "label:" */
4333 retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4334 if (retval == NULL)
4335 retval = path;
4336# else /* Unix */
4337 retval = path;
4338# endif
4339#endif
4340
4341 while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4342 ++retval;
4343
4344 return retval;
4345}
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004346
4347/*
4348 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4349 */
4350 int
4351vim_ispathsep(c)
4352 int c;
4353{
4354#ifdef RISCOS
4355 return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4356#else
4357# ifdef UNIX
4358 return (c == '/'); /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4359# else
4360# ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4361 return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4362# else
4363# ifdef VMS
4364 /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4365 return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4366 || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4367# else
4368# ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP
4369 return (c == ':');
4370# else /* Amiga */
4371 return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4372# endif
4373# endif /* VMS */
4374# endif
4375# endif
4376#endif /* RISC OS */
4377}
4378
4379#if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4380/*
4381 * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4382 */
4383 int
4384vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4385 int c;
4386{
4387#ifdef UNIX
4388 return (c == ':');
4389#else
4390 return (c == ';'); /* might not be rigth for every system... */
4391#endif
4392}
4393#endif
4394
4395#if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4396 || defined(PROTO)
4397/*
4398 * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4399 */
4400 int
4401vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4402 char_u *x, *y;
4403{
4404 return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4405}
4406
4407 int
4408vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4409 char_u *x, *y;
4410 size_t len;
4411{
4412 while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4413 {
4414 if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4415 && !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4416 && !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4417 break;
4418 ++x;
4419 ++y;
4420 --len;
4421 }
4422 if (len == 0)
4423 return 0;
4424 return (*x - *y);
4425}
4426#endif
4427
4428/*
4429 * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4430 * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4431 */
4432 char_u *
4433concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4434 char_u *fname1;
4435 char_u *fname2;
4436 int sep;
4437{
4438 char_u *dest;
4439
4440 dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4441 if (dest != NULL)
4442 {
4443 STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4444 if (sep)
4445 add_pathsep(dest);
4446 STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4447 }
4448 return dest;
4449}
4450
Bram Moolenaard6754642005-01-17 22:18:45 +00004451#if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(FEAT_GETTEXT) || defined(PROTO)
4452/*
4453 * Concatenate two strings and return the result in allocated memory.
4454 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4455 */
4456 char_u *
4457concat_str(str1, str2)
4458 char_u *str1;
4459 char_u *str2;
4460{
4461 char_u *dest;
4462 size_t l = STRLEN(str1);
4463
4464 dest = alloc((unsigned)(l + STRLEN(str2) + 1L));
4465 if (dest != NULL)
4466 {
4467 STRCPY(dest, str1);
4468 STRCPY(dest + l, str2);
4469 }
4470 return dest;
4471}
4472#endif
4473
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004474/*
4475 * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4476 * separator.
4477 */
4478 void
4479add_pathsep(p)
4480 char_u *p;
4481{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00004482 if (*p != NUL && !after_pathsep(p, p + STRLEN(p)))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00004483 STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4484}
4485
4486/*
4487 * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4488 * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4489 */
4490 char_u *
4491FullName_save(fname, force)
4492 char_u *fname;
4493 int force; /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4494 like a full path name */
4495{
4496 char_u *buf;
4497 char_u *new_fname = NULL;
4498
4499 if (fname == NULL)
4500 return NULL;
4501
4502 buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4503 if (buf != NULL)
4504 {
4505 if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4506 new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4507 else
4508 new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4509 vim_free(buf);
4510 }
4511 return new_fname;
4512}
4513
4514#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4515
4516static char_u *skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4517
4518/*
4519 * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4520 * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4521 */
4522 pos_T *
4523find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4524 int ind_maxcomment;
4525{
4526 pos_T *pos;
4527 char_u *line;
4528 char_u *p;
4529
4530 if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4531 return NULL;
4532
4533 /*
4534 * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4535 */
4536 line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4537 for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4538 p = skip_string(p);
4539 if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4540 return NULL;
4541 return pos;
4542}
4543
4544/*
4545 * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4546 * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4547 */
4548 static char_u *
4549skip_string(p)
4550 char_u *p;
4551{
4552 int i;
4553
4554 /*
4555 * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4556 */
4557 for ( ; ; ++p)
4558 {
4559 if (p[0] == '\'') /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4560 {
4561 if (!p[1]) /* ' at end of line */
4562 break;
4563 i = 2;
4564 if (p[1] == '\\') /* '\n' or '\000' */
4565 {
4566 ++i;
4567 while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1])) /* '\000' */
4568 ++i;
4569 }
4570 if (p[i] == '\'') /* check for trailing ' */
4571 {
4572 p += i;
4573 continue;
4574 }
4575 }
4576 else if (p[0] == '"') /* start of string */
4577 {
4578 for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4579 {
4580 if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4581 ++p;
4582 else if (p[0] == '"') /* end of string */
4583 break;
4584 }
4585 if (p[0] == '"')
4586 continue;
4587 }
4588 break; /* no string found */
4589 }
4590 if (!*p)
4591 --p; /* backup from NUL */
4592 return p;
4593}
4594#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4595
4596#if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4597
4598/*
4599 * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4600 */
4601 void
4602do_c_expr_indent()
4603{
4604# ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4605 if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4606 fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4607 else
4608# endif
4609 fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4610}
4611
4612/*
4613 * Functions for C-indenting.
4614 * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4615 */
4616/*
4617 * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4618 */
4619
4620static char_u *cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4621static int cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4622static pos_T *find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4623static int cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4624static int cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4625static char_u *after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4626static int get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4627static int skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4628static int cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4629static int cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4630static int cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4631static int cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4632static int cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4633static int cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4634static int cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4635static int cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4636static int cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4637static int cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4638static int cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4639static int cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4640static int cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4641static int cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4642static int cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4643static int cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4644static int cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4645static pos_T *find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4646static pos_T *find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4647static int corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4648static int find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4649static int find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4650
4651/*
4652 * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4653 */
4654 static char_u *
4655cin_skipcomment(s)
4656 char_u *s;
4657{
4658 while (*s)
4659 {
4660 s = skipwhite(s);
4661 if (*s != '/')
4662 break;
4663 ++s;
4664 if (*s == '/') /* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4665 {
4666 s += STRLEN(s);
4667 break;
4668 }
4669 if (*s != '*')
4670 break;
4671 for (++s; *s; ++s) /* skip slash-star comment */
4672 if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4673 {
4674 s += 2;
4675 break;
4676 }
4677 }
4678 return s;
4679}
4680
4681/*
4682 * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s. White space and comments are
4683 * not considered code.
4684 */
4685 static int
4686cin_nocode(s)
4687 char_u *s;
4688{
4689 return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4690}
4691
4692/*
4693 * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4694 */
4695 static pos_T *
4696find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4697{
4698 static pos_T pos;
4699 char_u *line;
4700 char_u *p;
4701
4702 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4703 while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4704 {
4705 line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4706 p = skipwhite(line);
4707 if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4708 {
4709 pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4710 return &pos;
4711 }
4712 if (*p != NUL)
4713 break;
4714 }
4715 return NULL;
4716}
4717
4718/*
4719 * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4720 */
4721 static int
4722cin_islabel_skip(s)
4723 char_u **s;
4724{
4725 if (!vim_isIDc(**s)) /* need at least one ID character */
4726 return FALSE;
4727
4728 while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4729 (*s)++;
4730
4731 *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4732
4733 /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4734 return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4735}
4736
4737/*
4738 * Recognize a label: "label:".
4739 * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4740 */
4741 int
4742cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
4743 int ind_maxcomment;
4744{
4745 char_u *s;
4746
4747 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4748
4749 /*
4750 * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4751 * like a switch label. Same for C++ scope declarations.
4752 */
4753 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4754 return FALSE;
4755 if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4756 return FALSE;
4757
4758 if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4759 {
4760 /*
4761 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4762 * label.
4763 */
4764 pos_T cursor_save;
4765 pos_T *trypos;
4766 char_u *line;
4767
4768 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4769 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4770 {
4771 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4772
4773 /*
4774 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4775 */
4776 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4777 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4778 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4779
4780 line = ml_get_curline();
4781 if (cin_ispreproc(line)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4782 continue;
4783 if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4784 continue;
4785
4786 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4787 if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4788 || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4789 || cin_iscase(line)
4790 || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4791 return TRUE;
4792 return FALSE;
4793 }
4794 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4795 return TRUE; /* label at start of file??? */
4796 }
4797 return FALSE;
4798}
4799
4800/*
4801 * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4802 * Q&D-Implementation:
4803 * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4804 */
4805 static int
4806cin_isinit(void)
4807{
4808 char_u *s;
4809
4810 s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4811
4812 if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4813 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4814
4815 if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4816 return TRUE;
4817
4818 if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4819 return TRUE;
4820
4821 return FALSE;
4822}
4823
4824/*
4825 * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4826 */
4827 int
4828cin_iscase(s)
4829 char_u *s;
4830{
4831 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4832 if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4833 {
4834 for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4835 {
4836 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4837 if (*s == ':')
4838 {
4839 if (s[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4840 ++s;
4841 else
4842 return TRUE;
4843 }
4844 if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4845 s += 2; /* skip over '.' */
4846 else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4847 return FALSE; /* stop at comment */
4848 else if (*s == '"')
4849 return FALSE; /* stop at string */
4850 }
4851 return FALSE;
4852 }
4853
4854 if (cin_isdefault(s))
4855 return TRUE;
4856 return FALSE;
4857}
4858
4859/*
4860 * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4861 */
4862 static int
4863cin_isdefault(s)
4864 char_u *s;
4865{
4866 return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4867 && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4868 && s[1] != ':');
4869}
4870
4871/*
4872 * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4873 */
4874 int
4875cin_isscopedecl(s)
4876 char_u *s;
4877{
4878 int i;
4879
4880 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4881 if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4882 i = 6;
4883 else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4884 i = 9;
4885 else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4886 i = 7;
4887 else
4888 return FALSE;
4889 return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4890}
4891
4892/*
4893 * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4894 * Return NULL if not found.
4895 * case 234: a = b;
4896 * ^
4897 */
4898 static char_u *
4899after_label(l)
4900 char_u *l;
4901{
4902 for ( ; *l; ++l)
4903 {
4904 if (*l == ':')
4905 {
4906 if (l[1] == ':') /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4907 ++l;
4908 else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4909 break;
4910 }
4911 else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4912 l += 2; /* skip over 'x' */
4913 }
4914 if (*l == NUL)
4915 return NULL;
4916 l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
4917 if (*l == NUL)
4918 return NULL;
4919 return l;
4920}
4921
4922/*
4923 * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
4924 * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
4925 */
4926 static int
4927get_indent_nolabel(lnum) /* XXX */
4928 linenr_T lnum;
4929{
4930 char_u *l;
4931 pos_T fp;
4932 colnr_T col;
4933 char_u *p;
4934
4935 l = ml_get(lnum);
4936 p = after_label(l);
4937 if (p == NULL)
4938 return 0;
4939
4940 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
4941 fp.lnum = lnum;
4942 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4943 return (int)col;
4944}
4945
4946/*
4947 * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
4948 * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
4949 * label: if (asdf && asdfasdf)
4950 * ^
4951 */
4952 static int
4953skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
4954 linenr_T lnum;
4955 char_u **pp;
4956 int ind_maxcomment;
4957{
4958 char_u *l;
4959 int amount;
4960 pos_T cursor_save;
4961
4962 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4963 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
4964 l = ml_get_curline();
4965 /* XXX */
4966 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
4967 {
4968 amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
4969 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
4970 if (l == NULL) /* just in case */
4971 l = ml_get_curline();
4972 }
4973 else
4974 {
4975 amount = get_indent();
4976 l = ml_get_curline();
4977 }
4978 *pp = l;
4979
4980 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4981 return amount;
4982}
4983
4984/*
4985 * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
4986 * int a, indent of "a"
4987 * static struct foo b, indent of "b"
4988 * enum bla c, indent of "c"
4989 * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
4990 */
4991 static int
4992cin_first_id_amount()
4993{
4994 char_u *line, *p, *s;
4995 int len;
4996 pos_T fp;
4997 colnr_T col;
4998
4999 line = ml_get_curline();
5000 p = skipwhite(line);
5001 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5002 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
5003 {
5004 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5005 len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
5006 }
5007 if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
5008 p = skipwhite(p + 6);
5009 else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
5010 p = skipwhite(p + 4);
5011 else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
5012 || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
5013 {
5014 s = skipwhite(p + len);
5015 if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
5016 || (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
5017 || (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
5018 || (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
5019 p = s;
5020 }
5021 for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
5022 ;
5023 if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
5024 return 0;
5025
5026 p = skipwhite(p + len);
5027 fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5028 fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
5029 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5030 return (int)col;
5031}
5032
5033/*
5034 * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
5035 * char *foo = "here";
5036 * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
5037 * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
5038 * foo = "asdf\
5039 * asdf\
5040 * here";
5041 */
5042 static int
5043cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
5044 linenr_T lnum;
5045{
5046 char_u *line;
5047 char_u *s;
5048 colnr_T col;
5049 pos_T fp;
5050
5051 if (lnum > 1)
5052 {
5053 line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
5054 if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
5055 return -1;
5056 }
5057
5058 line = s = ml_get(lnum);
5059 while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
5060 {
5061 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5062 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5063 else
5064 ++s;
5065 }
5066 if (*s != '=')
5067 return 0;
5068
5069 s = skipwhite(s + 1);
5070 if (cin_nocode(s))
5071 return 0;
5072
5073 if (*s == '"') /* nice alignment for continued strings */
5074 ++s;
5075
5076 fp.lnum = lnum;
5077 fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5078 getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
5079 return (int)col;
5080}
5081
5082/*
5083 * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
5084 */
5085 static int
5086cin_ispreproc(s)
5087 char_u *s;
5088{
5089 s = skipwhite(s);
5090 if (*s == '#')
5091 return TRUE;
5092 return FALSE;
5093}
5094
5095/*
5096 * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
5097 * continuation line of a preprocessor statement. Decrease "*lnump" to the
5098 * start and return the line in "*pp".
5099 */
5100 static int
5101cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
5102 char_u **pp;
5103 linenr_T *lnump;
5104{
5105 char_u *line = *pp;
5106 linenr_T lnum = *lnump;
5107 int retval = FALSE;
5108
5109 while (1)
5110 {
5111 if (cin_ispreproc(line))
5112 {
5113 retval = TRUE;
5114 *lnump = lnum;
5115 break;
5116 }
5117 if (lnum == 1)
5118 break;
5119 line = ml_get(--lnum);
5120 if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
5121 break;
5122 }
5123
5124 if (lnum != *lnump)
5125 *pp = ml_get(*lnump);
5126 return retval;
5127}
5128
5129/*
5130 * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
5131 */
5132 static int
5133cin_iscomment(p)
5134 char_u *p;
5135{
5136 return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
5137}
5138
5139/*
5140 * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
5141 */
5142 static int
5143cin_islinecomment(p)
5144 char_u *p;
5145{
5146 return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
5147}
5148
5149/*
5150 * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
5151 * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
5152 * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
5153 * both apply in order to determine initializations).
5154 */
5155 static int
5156cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
5157 char_u *s;
5158 int incl_open; /* include '{' at the end as terminator */
5159 int incl_comma; /* recognize a trailing comma */
5160{
5161 char_u found_start = 0;
5162
5163 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5164
5165 if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
5166 found_start = *s;
5167
5168 while (*s)
5169 {
5170 /* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
5171 s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
5172 if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
5173 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
5174 && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5175 return *s;
5176
5177 if (*s)
5178 s++;
5179 }
5180 return found_start;
5181}
5182
5183/*
5184 * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5185 * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5186 * no semicolons anywhere.
5187 * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5188 * "sp" points to a string with the line. When looking at other lines it must
5189 * be restored to the line. When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5190 * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5191 */
5192 static int
5193cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5194 char_u **sp;
5195 linenr_T first_lnum;
5196{
5197 char_u *s;
5198 linenr_T lnum = first_lnum;
5199 int retval = FALSE;
5200
5201 if (sp == NULL)
5202 s = ml_get(lnum);
5203 else
5204 s = *sp;
5205
5206 while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5207 {
5208 if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5209 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5210 else
5211 ++s;
5212 }
5213 if (*s != '(')
5214 return FALSE; /* ';', ' or " before any () or no '(' */
5215
5216 while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5217 {
5218 if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5219 {
5220 /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5221 * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5222 * #if defined(x) && \
5223 * defined(y)
5224 */
5225 lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5226 s = ml_get(lnum);
5227 if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5228 retval = TRUE;
5229 goto done;
5230 }
5231 if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5232 {
5233 /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5234 if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5235 break;
5236
5237 s = ml_get(++lnum);
5238 }
5239 else if (cin_iscomment(s)) /* ignore comments */
5240 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5241 else
5242 ++s;
5243 }
5244
5245done:
5246 if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5247 *sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5248
5249 return retval;
5250}
5251
5252 static int
5253cin_isif(p)
5254 char_u *p;
5255{
5256 return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5257}
5258
5259 static int
5260cin_iselse(p)
5261 char_u *p;
5262{
5263 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} else" */
5264 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5265 return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5266}
5267
5268 static int
5269cin_isdo(p)
5270 char_u *p;
5271{
5272 return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5273}
5274
5275/*
5276 * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5277 * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5278 * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5279 */
5280 static int
5281cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen) /* XXX */
5282 char_u *p;
5283 linenr_T lnum;
5284 int ind_maxparen;
5285{
5286 pos_T cursor_save;
5287 pos_T *trypos;
5288 int retval = FALSE;
5289
5290 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5291 if (*p == '}') /* accept "} while (cond);" */
5292 p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5293 if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5294 {
5295 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5296 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5297 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5298 p = ml_get_curline();
5299 while (*p && *p != 'w') /* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5300 {
5301 ++p;
5302 ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5303 }
5304 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5305 && *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5306 retval = TRUE;
5307 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5308 }
5309 return retval;
5310}
5311
5312 static int
5313cin_isbreak(p)
5314 char_u *p;
5315{
5316 return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5317}
5318
5319/* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5320 * constructor-initialization. eg:
5321 *
5322 * class MyClass :
5323 * baseClass <-- here
5324 * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5325 * anotherBaseClass <-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5326 * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5327 * baseClass(...) <-- here (constructor-initialization)
5328 */
5329 static int
5330cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5331 char_u *line;
5332 colnr_T *col;
5333{
5334 char_u *s;
5335 int class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5336
5337 *col = 0;
5338
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00005339 s = skipwhite(line);
5340 if (*s == '#') /* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5341 return FALSE;
5342 s = cin_skipcomment(s);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00005343 if (*s == NUL)
5344 return FALSE;
5345
5346 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5347
5348 while(*s != NUL)
5349 {
5350 if (s[0] == ':')
5351 {
5352 if (s[1] == ':')
5353 {
5354 /* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5355 * initialization any more */
5356 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5357 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5358 }
5359 else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5360 {
5361 /* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5362 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5363 cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5364 lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5365 *col = 0;
5366 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5367 }
5368 else
5369 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5370 }
5371 else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5372 || (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5373 {
5374 class_or_struct = TRUE;
5375 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5376
5377 if (*s == 'c')
5378 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5379 else
5380 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5381 }
5382 else
5383 {
5384 if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5385 {
5386 cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5387 }
5388 else if (s[0] == ')')
5389 {
5390 /* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5391 * something like "):" */
5392 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5393 lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5394 }
5395 else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5396 {
5397 /* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5398 class_or_struct = FALSE;
5399 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5400 }
5401 else if (*col == 0)
5402 {
5403 /* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5404 lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5405
5406 /* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5407 if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5408 *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5409 }
5410
5411 s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5412 }
5413 }
5414
5415 return cpp_base_class;
5416}
5417
5418/*
5419 * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5420 * white space and comments. Skip strings and comments.
5421 * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5422 */
5423 static int
5424cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5425 char_u *s;
5426 char_u *find;
5427 char_u *ignore;
5428{
5429 char_u *p = s;
5430 char_u *r;
5431 int len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5432
5433 while (*p != NUL)
5434 {
5435 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5436 if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5437 {
5438 r = skipwhite(p + len);
5439 if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5440 r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5441 if (cin_nocode(r))
5442 return TRUE;
5443 }
5444 if (*p != NUL)
5445 ++p;
5446 }
5447 return FALSE;
5448}
5449
5450/*
5451 * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5452 * Return the column found.
5453 */
5454 static int
5455cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5456 pos_T *trypos;
5457{
5458 char_u *line;
5459 char_u *p;
5460
5461 p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5462 while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5463 {
5464 if (cin_iscomment(p))
5465 p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5466 else
5467 {
5468 p = skip_string(p);
5469 ++p;
5470 }
5471 }
5472 return (int)(p - line);
5473}
5474
5475/*
5476 * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5477 * Return NULL if no match found.
5478 * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5479 * work. */
5480/* foo() */
5481/* { */
5482/* } */
5483
5484 static pos_T *
5485find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5486 int ind_maxcomment;
5487{
5488 pos_T cursor_save;
5489 pos_T *trypos;
5490 pos_T *pos;
5491 static pos_T pos_copy;
5492
5493 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5494 while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5495 {
5496 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5497 trypos = &pos_copy;
5498 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5499 pos = NULL;
5500 /* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5501 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5502 && (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5503 break;
5504 if (pos != NULL)
5505 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5506 }
5507 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5508 return trypos;
5509}
5510
5511/*
5512 * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5513 * Return NULL of no match found.
5514 */
5515 static pos_T *
5516find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) /* XXX */
5517 int ind_maxparen;
5518 int ind_maxcomment;
5519{
5520 pos_T cursor_save;
5521 pos_T *trypos;
5522 static pos_T pos_copy;
5523
5524 cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5525 if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5526 {
5527 /* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5528 if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5529 trypos = NULL;
5530 else
5531 {
5532 pos_copy = *trypos; /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5533 trypos = &pos_copy;
5534 curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5535 if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5536 trypos = NULL;
5537 }
5538 }
5539 curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5540 return trypos;
5541}
5542
5543/*
5544 * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5545 * cursor position and "startpos". This makes sure that searching for a
5546 * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5547 * looking a few lines further.
5548 */
5549 static int
5550corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5551 int ind_maxparen;
5552 pos_T *startpos;
5553{
5554 long n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5555
5556 if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5557 return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5558 return ind_maxparen;
5559}
5560
5561/*
5562 * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5563 * line "l".
5564 */
5565 static int
5566find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5567 char_u *l;
5568 int start, end;
5569{
5570 int i;
5571 int retval = FALSE;
5572 int open_count = 0;
5573
5574 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0; /* default is start of line */
5575
5576 for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5577 {
5578 i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5579 i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in quotes */
5580 if (l[i] == start)
5581 ++open_count;
5582 else if (l[i] == end)
5583 {
5584 if (open_count > 0)
5585 --open_count;
5586 else
5587 {
5588 curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5589 retval = TRUE;
5590 }
5591 }
5592 }
5593 return retval;
5594}
5595
5596 int
5597get_c_indent()
5598{
5599 /*
5600 * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5601 * block should be
5602 */
5603 int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5604
5605 /*
5606 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5607 * line is imagined to be.
5608 */
5609 int ind_open_imag = 0;
5610
5611 /*
5612 * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5613 * an opening brace.
5614 */
5615 int ind_no_brace = 0;
5616
5617 /*
5618 * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5619 */
5620 int ind_first_open = 0;
5621
5622 /*
5623 * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5624 * located
5625 */
5626 int ind_open_extra = 0;
5627
5628 /*
5629 * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5630 * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5631 * brace should be located
5632 */
5633 int ind_close_extra = 0;
5634
5635 /*
5636 * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5637 * column is imagined to be
5638 */
5639 int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5640
5641 /*
5642 * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5643 */
5644 int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5645
5646 /*
5647 * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5648 */
5649 int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5650
5651 /*
5652 * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5653 */
5654 int ind_case_break = 0;
5655
5656 /*
5657 * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5658 * should be located
5659 */
5660 int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5661
5662 /*
5663 * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5664 */
5665 int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5666
5667 /*
5668 * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5669 */
5670 int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5671
5672 /*
5673 * amount a function type spec should be indented
5674 */
5675 int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5676
5677 /*
5678 * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5679 * should be indented
5680 */
5681 int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5682
5683 /*
5684 * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5685 * should be located
5686 */
5687 int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5688
5689 /*
5690 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5691 */
5692 int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5693
5694 /*
5695 * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5696 * itself is also unclosed
5697 */
5698 int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5699
5700 /*
5701 * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5702 * unclosed parentheses.
5703 */
5704 int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5705
5706 /*
5707 * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5708 * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5709 * context (for very long lines).
5710 */
5711 int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5712
5713 /*
5714 * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5715 * an unclosed parentheses.
5716 */
5717 int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5718
5719 /*
5720 * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5721 * opening parentheses.
5722 */
5723 int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5724
5725 /*
5726 * Extra indent for comments.
5727 */
5728 int ind_comment = 0;
5729
5730 /*
5731 * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5732 */
5733 int ind_in_comment = 3;
5734
5735 /*
5736 * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5737 * after the comment opener.
5738 */
5739 int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5740
5741 /*
5742 * max lines to search for an open paren
5743 */
5744 int ind_maxparen = 20;
5745
5746 /*
5747 * max lines to search for an open comment
5748 */
5749 int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5750
5751 /*
5752 * handle braces for java code
5753 */
5754 int ind_java = 0;
5755
5756 /*
5757 * handle blocked cases correctly
5758 */
5759 int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5760
5761 pos_T cur_curpos;
5762 int amount;
5763 int scope_amount;
5764 int cur_amount;
5765 colnr_T col;
5766 char_u *theline;
5767 char_u *linecopy;
5768 pos_T *trypos;
5769 pos_T *tryposBrace = NULL;
5770 pos_T our_paren_pos;
5771 char_u *start;
5772 int start_brace;
5773#define BRACE_IN_COL0 1 /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5774#define BRACE_AT_START 2 /* '{' is at start of line */
5775#define BRACE_AT_END 3 /* '{' is at end of line */
5776 linenr_T ourscope;
5777 char_u *l;
5778 char_u *look;
5779 char_u terminated;
5780 int lookfor;
5781#define LOOKFOR_INITIAL 0
5782#define LOOKFOR_IF 1
5783#define LOOKFOR_DO 2
5784#define LOOKFOR_CASE 3
5785#define LOOKFOR_ANY 4
5786#define LOOKFOR_TERM 5
5787#define LOOKFOR_UNTERM 6
5788#define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL 7
5789#define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK 8
5790#define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS 9
5791#define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT 10
5792
5793 int whilelevel;
5794 linenr_T lnum;
5795 char_u *options;
5796 int fraction = 0; /* init for GCC */
5797 int divider;
5798 int n;
5799 int iscase;
5800 int lookfor_break;
5801 int cont_amount = 0; /* amount for continuation line */
5802
5803 for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5804 {
5805 l = options++;
5806 if (*options == '-')
5807 ++options;
5808 n = getdigits(&options);
5809 divider = 0;
5810 if (*options == '.') /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5811 {
5812 fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5813 while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5814 {
5815 ++options;
5816 if (divider)
5817 divider *= 10;
5818 else
5819 divider = 10;
5820 }
5821 }
5822 if (*options == 's') /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5823 {
5824 if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5825 n = curbuf->b_p_sw; /* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5826 else
5827 {
5828 n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5829 if (divider)
5830 n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5831 }
5832 ++options;
5833 }
5834 if (l[1] == '-')
5835 n = -n;
5836 /* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5837 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5838 switch (*l)
5839 {
5840 case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5841 case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5842 case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5843 case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5844 case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5845 case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5846 case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5847 case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5848 case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5849 case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5850 case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5851 case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5852 case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5853 case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5854 case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5855 case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5856 case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5857 case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5858 case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5859 case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5860 case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5861 case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5862 case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5863 case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5864 case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5865 case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5866 case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5867 case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5868 case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5869 }
5870 }
5871
5872 /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5873 cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5874
5875 /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5876 * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5877 * ml_get is valid! */
5878 linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5879 if (linecopy == NULL)
5880 return 0;
5881
5882 /*
5883 * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5884 * cursor position. We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5885 * inserting new stuff.
5886 * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5887 * check for that.
5888 */
5889 if ((State & INSERT)
5890 && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5891 && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5892 linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5893
5894 theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5895
5896 /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5897
5898 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5899
5900 /*
5901 * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5902 */
5903 if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5904 {
5905 amount = 0;
5906 }
5907
5908 /*
5909 * Is it a non-case label? Then that goes at the left margin too.
5910 */
5911 else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)) /* XXX */
5912 {
5913 amount = 0;
5914 }
5915
5916 /*
5917 * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
5918 * previous line, lineup with that one.
5919 */
5920 else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
5921 && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
5922 {
5923 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5924 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5925 amount = col;
5926 }
5927
5928 /*
5929 * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
5930 * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
5931 */
5932 else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
5933 && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
5934 {
5935 int lead_start_len = 2;
5936 int lead_middle_len = 1;
5937 char_u lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* start-comment string */
5938 char_u lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* middle-comment string */
5939 char_u lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN]; /* end-comment string */
5940 char_u *p;
5941 int start_align = 0;
5942 int start_off = 0;
5943 int done = FALSE;
5944
5945 /* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5946 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5947 amount = col;
5948
5949 p = curbuf->b_p_com;
5950 while (*p != NUL)
5951 {
5952 int align = 0;
5953 int off = 0;
5954 int what = 0;
5955
5956 while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
5957 {
5958 if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
5959 what = *p++;
5960 else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
5961 align = *p++;
5962 else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
5963 off = getdigits(&p);
5964 else
5965 ++p;
5966 }
5967
5968 if (*p == ':')
5969 ++p;
5970 (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
5971 if (what == COM_START)
5972 {
5973 STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
5974 lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
5975 start_off = off;
5976 start_align = align;
5977 }
5978 else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
5979 {
5980 STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
5981 lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
5982 }
5983 else if (what == COM_END)
5984 {
5985 /* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
5986 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
5987 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
5988 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
5989 {
5990 done = TRUE;
5991 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
5992 {
5993 /* If the start comment string matches in the previous
5994 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset. If
5995 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
5996 * line, use the indent of that line. XXX */
5997 look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
5998 if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
5999 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6000 else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
6001 lead_middle_len) == 0)
6002 {
6003 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6004 break;
6005 }
6006 /* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
6007 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
6008 else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
6009 lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
6010 continue;
6011 }
6012 if (start_off != 0)
6013 amount += start_off;
6014 else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006015 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6016 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006017 break;
6018 }
6019
6020 /* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
6021 * with the middle comment */
6022 if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
6023 && STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
6024 {
6025 amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6026 /* XXX */
6027 if (off != 0)
6028 amount += off;
6029 else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
Bram Moolenaar21cf8232004-07-16 20:18:37 +00006030 amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
6031 - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00006032 done = TRUE;
6033 break;
6034 }
6035 }
6036 }
6037
6038 /* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
6039 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
6040 * with the first character of the comment text.
6041 */
6042 if (done)
6043 ;
6044 else if (theline[0] == '*')
6045 amount += 1;
6046 else
6047 {
6048 /*
6049 * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
6050 * the indent of the previous non-empty line. If 'cino' has "CO"
6051 * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
6052 * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
6053 * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
6054 */
6055 amount = -1;
6056 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
6057 {
6058 if (linewhite(lnum)) /* skip blank lines */
6059 continue;
6060 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6061 break;
6062 }
6063 if (amount == -1) /* use the comment opener */
6064 {
6065 if (!ind_in_comment2)
6066 {
6067 start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
6068 look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
6069 if (*look != NUL) /* if something after it */
6070 trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
6071 }
6072 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6073 amount = col;
6074 if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
6075 amount += ind_in_comment;
6076 }
6077 }
6078 }
6079
6080 /*
6081 * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
6082 */ /* XXX */
6083 else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6084 && ind_java == 0)
6085 || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6086 || trypos != NULL)
6087 {
6088 if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
6089 {
6090 /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found. Use the one which is
6091 * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
6092 if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
6093 ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
6094 : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
6095 trypos = NULL;
6096 else
6097 tryposBrace = NULL;
6098 }
6099
6100 if (trypos != NULL)
6101 {
6102 /*
6103 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
6104 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
6105 */
6106 amount = -1;
6107 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6108 our_paren_pos = *trypos;
6109 for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
6110 {
6111 l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
6112 if (cin_nocode(l)) /* skip comment lines */
6113 continue;
6114 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum)) /* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
6115 continue;
6116 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
6117
6118 /* Skip a comment. XXX */
6119 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6120 {
6121 lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6122 continue;
6123 }
6124
6125 /* XXX */
6126 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
6127 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6128 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
6129 && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
6130 && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
6131 {
6132 amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum); /* XXX */
6133
6134 if (theline[0] == ')')
6135 {
6136 if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
6137 cur_amount = amount;
6138 amount = -1;
6139 }
6140 break;
6141 }
6142 }
6143
6144 /*
6145 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
6146 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
6147 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
6148 */
6149 if (amount == -1)
6150 {
6151 amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
6152 if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
6153 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6154 {
6155 /*
6156 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
6157 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
6158 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
6159 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
6160 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
6161 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
6162 * lines).
6163 */
6164 if (theline[0] != ')')
6165 {
6166 cur_amount = MAXCOL;
6167 l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
6168 if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
6169 && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
6170 {
6171 /* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
6172 * for each additional level */
6173 n = 1;
6174 for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
6175 {
6176 switch (l[col])
6177 {
6178 case '(':
6179 case '{': ++n;
6180 break;
6181
6182 case ')':
6183 case '}': if (n > 1)
6184 --n;
6185 break;
6186 }
6187 }
6188
6189 our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6190 amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6191 }
6192 else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6193 our_paren_pos.col++;
6194 else
6195 {
6196 col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6197 while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6198 col++;
6199 if (l[col] != NUL) /* In case of trailing space */
6200 our_paren_pos.col = col;
6201 else
6202 our_paren_pos.col++;
6203 }
6204 }
6205
6206 /*
6207 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6208 * if we did the above "if".
6209 */
6210 if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6211 {
6212 getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6213 if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6214 cur_amount = col;
6215 }
6216 }
6217
6218 if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6219 {
6220 /* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6221 }
6222 else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6223 && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6224 {
6225 if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6226 amount = cur_amount;
6227 }
6228 else
6229 {
6230 /* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
6231 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6232 while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6233 {
6234 --our_paren_pos.col;
6235 switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6236 {
6237 case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6238 col = our_paren_pos.col;
6239 break;
6240 case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6241 col = MAXCOL;
6242 break;
6243 }
6244 }
6245
6246 /* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6247 * braces */
6248 if (col == MAXCOL)
6249 amount += ind_unclosed;
6250 else
6251 {
6252 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6253 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6254 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6255 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6256 amount += ind_unclosed2;
6257 else
6258 amount += ind_unclosed;
6259 }
6260 /*
6261 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6262 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6263 * lines:
6264 * func_long_name( if (x
6265 * arg && yy
6266 * ) ^ not here ) ^ not here
6267 */
6268 if (cur_amount < amount)
6269 amount = cur_amount;
6270 }
6271 }
6272
6273 /* add extra indent for a comment */
6274 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6275 amount += ind_comment;
6276 }
6277
6278 /*
6279 * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6280 */
6281 else
6282 {
6283 trypos = tryposBrace;
6284
6285 ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6286 start = ml_get(ourscope);
6287
6288 /*
6289 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6290 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6291 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6292 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6293 */
6294 look = skipwhite(start);
6295 if (*look == '{')
6296 {
6297 getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6298 amount = col;
6299 if (*start == '{')
6300 start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6301 else
6302 start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6303 }
6304 else
6305 {
6306 /*
6307 * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6308 * line. if so, find the start of the line.
6309 */
6310 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6311
6312 /*
6313 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6314 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6315 */
6316 lnum = ourscope;
6317 if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6318 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6319 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6320 lnum = trypos->lnum;
6321
6322 /*
6323 * It could have been something like
6324 * case 1: if (asdf &&
6325 * ldfd) {
6326 * }
6327 */
6328 if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6329 amount = get_indent();
6330 else
6331 amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6332
6333 start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6334 }
6335
6336 /*
6337 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6338 * we want to be. otherwise, add the amount of room
6339 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6340 */
6341 if (theline[0] == '}')
6342 {
6343 /*
6344 * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6345 * other than the open brace. indulge them, if so.
6346 */
6347 amount += ind_close_extra;
6348 }
6349 else
6350 {
6351 /*
6352 * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6353 * to match it with.
6354 * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6355 * to match it with.
6356 */
6357 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6358 if (cin_iselse(theline))
6359 lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6360 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6361 /* XXX */
6362 lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6363 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6364 {
6365 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6366 if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6367 ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6368 {
6369 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6370 goto theend;
6371 }
6372 }
6373
6374 /*
6375 * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6376 * failed to find a matching "if").
6377 * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6378 * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6379 */
6380
6381 /*
6382 * if the '{' is _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6383 * location of a left-margin brace. Otherwise, correct the
6384 * location for ind_open_extra.
6385 */
6386
6387 if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0) /* '{' is in column 0 */
6388 {
6389 amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6390 }
6391 else
6392 {
6393 if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END) /* '{' is at end of line */
6394 amount += ind_open_imag;
6395 else
6396 {
6397 /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6398 amount -= ind_open_extra;
6399 if (amount < 0)
6400 amount = 0;
6401 }
6402 }
6403
6404 lookfor_break = FALSE;
6405
6406 if (cin_iscase(theline)) /* it's a switch() label */
6407 {
6408 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE; /* find a previous switch() label */
6409 amount += ind_case;
6410 }
6411 else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline)) /* private:, ... */
6412 {
6413 lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL; /* class decl is this block */
6414 amount += ind_scopedecl;
6415 }
6416 else
6417 {
6418 if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline)) /* break; ... */
6419 lookfor_break = TRUE;
6420
6421 lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6422 amount += ind_level; /* ind_level from start of block */
6423 }
6424 scope_amount = amount;
6425 whilelevel = 0;
6426
6427 /*
6428 * Search backwards. If we find something we recognize, line up
6429 * with that.
6430 *
6431 * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6432 * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6433 * that opens the block.
6434 */
6435 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6436 for (;;)
6437 {
6438 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6439 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6440
6441 /*
6442 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6443 * up with it.
6444 */
6445 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6446 {
6447 /* we reached end of scope:
6448 * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6449 * go further back:
6450 * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6451 * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6452 * declaration:
6453 * int x,
6454 * here; <-- add ind_continuation
6455 */
6456 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6457 {
6458 if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6459 || curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6460 < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6461 {
6462 /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6463 * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6464 * initialization) */
6465 if (cont_amount > 0)
6466 amount = cont_amount;
6467 else
6468 amount += ind_continuation;
6469 break;
6470 }
6471
6472 l = ml_get_curline();
6473
6474 /*
6475 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6476 * comment.
6477 */
6478 trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6479 if (trypos != NULL)
6480 {
6481 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6482 continue;
6483 }
6484
6485 /*
6486 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6487 */
6488 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6489 continue;
6490
6491 if (cin_nocode(l))
6492 continue;
6493
6494 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6495
6496 /*
6497 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6498 * function declaration, we are done
6499 * (it's a variable declaration).
6500 */
6501 if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6502 || !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6503 {
6504 /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6505 * it is a continued variable initialization.
6506 * don't add extra indent.
6507 * TODO: does not work, if a function
6508 * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6509 * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6510 */
6511 if (terminated == ',')
6512 break;
6513
6514 /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6515 * we are done.
6516 */
6517 if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6518 break;
6519
6520 /* nothing useful found */
6521 if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6522 continue;
6523 }
6524
6525 if (terminated != ';')
6526 {
6527 /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6528 * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6529 * will take us back to the start of the line.
6530 */ /* XXX */
6531 trypos = NULL;
6532 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6533 trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6534 ind_maxcomment);
6535
6536 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6537 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6538
6539 if (trypos != NULL)
6540 {
6541 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6542 continue;
6543 }
6544 }
6545
6546 /* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6547 * like in
6548 * int a,
6549 * b;
6550 */
6551 if (cont_amount > 0)
6552 amount = cont_amount;
6553 else
6554 amount += ind_continuation;
6555 }
6556 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6557 {
6558 if (cont_amount > 0)
6559 amount = cont_amount;
6560 else
6561 amount += ind_continuation;
6562 }
6563 else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6564 && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6565 {
6566 amount = scope_amount;
6567 if (theline[0] == '{')
6568 amount += ind_open_extra;
6569 }
6570 break;
6571 }
6572
6573 /*
6574 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6575 */ /* XXX */
6576 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6577 {
6578 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6579 continue;
6580 }
6581
6582 l = ml_get_curline();
6583
6584 /*
6585 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6586 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6587 */
6588 iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6589 if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6590 {
6591 /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6592 * declaration/initialization any longer */
6593 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6594 break;
6595
6596 /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6597 * labels. */
6598 if (whilelevel > 0)
6599 continue;
6600
6601 /*
6602 * case xx:
6603 * c = 99 + <- this indent plus continuation
6604 *-> here;
6605 */
6606 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6607 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6608 {
6609 if (cont_amount > 0)
6610 amount = cont_amount;
6611 else
6612 amount += ind_continuation;
6613 break;
6614 }
6615
6616 /*
6617 * case xx: <- line up with this case
6618 * x = 333;
6619 * case yy:
6620 */
6621 if ( (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6622 || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6623 || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6624 {
6625 /*
6626 * Check that this case label is not for another
6627 * switch()
6628 */ /* XXX */
6629 if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6630 NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6631 {
6632 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
6633 break;
6634 }
6635 continue;
6636 }
6637
6638 n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum); /* XXX */
6639
6640 /*
6641 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6642 * y = y + 1;
6643 * -> s = 99;
6644 *
6645 * case xx:
6646 * if (cond) <- line up with this line
6647 * y = y + 1;
6648 * -> s = 99;
6649 */
6650 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6651 {
6652 if (n)
6653 amount = n;
6654
6655 if (!lookfor_break)
6656 break;
6657 }
6658
6659 /*
6660 * case xx: x = x + 1; <- line up with this x
6661 * -> y = y + 1;
6662 *
6663 * case xx: if (cond) <- line up with this if
6664 * -> y = y + 1;
6665 */
6666 if (n)
6667 {
6668 amount = n;
6669 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6670 if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6671 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6672 break;
6673 }
6674
6675 /*
6676 * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6677 * label. If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6678 * switch label.
6679 * break; <- may line up with this line
6680 * case xx:
6681 * -> y = 1;
6682 */
6683 scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase /* XXX */
6684 ? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6685 lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6686 continue;
6687 }
6688
6689 /*
6690 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6691 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6692 */
6693 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6694 {
6695 if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6696 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6697 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6698 continue;
6699 }
6700
6701 /*
6702 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6703 */
6704 if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6705 {
6706 l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6707 if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6708 continue;
6709 }
6710
6711 /*
6712 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6713 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6714 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6715 * unlocked it)
6716 */
6717 l = ml_get_curline();
6718 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6719 || cin_nocode(l))
6720 continue;
6721
6722 /*
6723 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6724 * constructor initialization?
6725 */ /* XXX */
6726 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6727 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6728 {
6729 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6730 {
6731 if (cont_amount > 0)
6732 amount = cont_amount;
6733 else
6734 amount += ind_continuation;
6735 }
6736 else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6737 {
6738 amount = get_indent();
6739 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6740 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6741 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6742 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6743 if (theline[0] != '{')
6744 amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6745 }
6746 else
6747 {
6748 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6749 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6750 amount = (int)col;
6751 }
6752 break;
6753 }
6754 else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6755 {
6756 /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6757 * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6758 if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6759 break;
6760 else
6761 continue;
6762 }
6763
6764 /*
6765 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6766 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6767 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6768 * 123,
6769 * sizeof
6770 * here
6771 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6772 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6773 * (indented).
6774 */
6775 terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6776
6777 if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6778 && terminated == ','))
6779 {
6780 /*
6781 * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6782 * go back to the line that starts it so
6783 * we can get the right prevailing indent
6784 * if ( foo &&
6785 * bar )
6786 */
6787 /*
6788 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6789 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6790 */
6791 (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6792 trypos = find_match_paren(
6793 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6794 ind_maxcomment);
6795
6796 /*
6797 * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6798 * braces.
6799 */
6800 if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6801 trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6802
6803 if (trypos != NULL)
6804 {
6805 /*
6806 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
6807 * handled above.
6808 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
6809 * asdf)
6810 */
6811 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6812 l = ml_get_curline();
6813 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6814 {
6815 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6816 continue;
6817 }
6818 }
6819
6820 /*
6821 * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6822 * indent from
6823 * char *usethis = "bla\
6824 * bla",
6825 * here;
6826 */
6827 if (terminated == ',')
6828 {
6829 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6830 {
6831 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6832 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6833 break;
6834 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6835 }
6836 }
6837
6838 /*
6839 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6840 * ignoring any jump label. XXX
6841 */
6842 cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6843 &l, ind_maxcomment);
6844
6845 /*
6846 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6847 * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6848 * while (not)
6849 * -> {
6850 * }
6851 */
6852 if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6853 && theline[0] == '{')
6854 {
6855 amount = cur_amount;
6856 /*
6857 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6858 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6859 * in the same line (scope is the same). Probably:
6860 * { 1, 2 },
6861 * -> { 3, 4 }
6862 */
6863 if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6864 amount += ind_open_extra;
6865
6866 if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6867 {
6868 /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6869 * class declaration or initialization */
6870 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6871 continue;
6872 }
6873 break;
6874 }
6875
6876 /*
6877 * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6878 * Also allow " } else".
6879 */
6880 if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6881 {
6882 /*
6883 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6884 * with the last one.
6885 * if (cond)
6886 * 100 +
6887 * -> here;
6888 */
6889 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6890 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6891 {
6892 if (cont_amount > 0)
6893 amount = cont_amount;
6894 else
6895 amount += ind_continuation;
6896 break;
6897 }
6898
6899 /*
6900 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6901 * are finished.
6902 * while (not)
6903 * -> here;
6904 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6905 * before this is terminated.
6906 * yyy;
6907 * if (stat)
6908 * while (not)
6909 * xxx;
6910 * -> here;
6911 */
6912 amount = cur_amount;
6913 if (theline[0] == '{')
6914 amount += ind_open_extra;
6915 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6916 {
6917 amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6918 break;
6919 }
6920
6921 /*
6922 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
6923 * do, line up with the while()
6924 * do
6925 * x = 1;
6926 * -> here
6927 */
6928 l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
6929 if (cin_isdo(l))
6930 {
6931 if (whilelevel == 0)
6932 break;
6933 --whilelevel;
6934 }
6935
6936 /*
6937 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
6938 * one between the "if" and the "else".
6939 * Need to use the scope of this "else". XXX
6940 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
6941 */
6942 if (cin_iselse(l)
6943 && whilelevel == 0
6944 && ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
6945 == NULL
6946 || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
6947 ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
6948 break;
6949 }
6950
6951 /*
6952 * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
6953 * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
6954 * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
6955 * the line before this one.
6956 */
6957 else
6958 {
6959 /*
6960 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
6961 * the last one.
6962 * c = 99 +
6963 * 100 +
6964 * -> here;
6965 */
6966 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6967 {
6968 /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
6969 if (terminated == ',')
6970 amount += ind_continuation;
6971 break;
6972 }
6973
6974 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6975 {
6976 /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
6977 * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
6978 * declaration/initialization, if it is an
6979 * opening brace or we are looking just for
6980 * enumerations/initializations. */
6981 if (terminated == ',')
6982 {
6983 if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
6984 break;
6985
6986 lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6987 continue;
6988 }
6989
6990 /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
6991 * reduce indent. */
6992 if (amount > cur_amount)
6993 amount = cur_amount;
6994 }
6995 else
6996 {
6997 /*
6998 * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
6999 * line up with this line, remember its indent
7000 * 100 +
7001 * -> here;
7002 */
7003 amount = cur_amount;
7004
7005 /*
7006 * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
7007 * are in an initialization or enum
7008 * struct xxx =
7009 * {
7010 * sizeof a,
7011 * 124 };
7012 * or a normal possible continuation line.
7013 * but only, of no other statement has been found
7014 * yet.
7015 */
7016 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
7017 {
7018 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
7019 cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7020 }
7021 else
7022 {
7023 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
7024 && *l != NUL
7025 && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7026 /* XXX */
7027 cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
7028 curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7029 if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
7030 lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
7031 }
7032 }
7033 }
7034 }
7035
7036 /*
7037 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
7038 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
7039 */
7040 /* XXX */
7041 else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
7042 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7043 {
7044 /*
7045 * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
7046 * with the last one.
7047 * while (cond);
7048 * 100 + <- line up with this one
7049 * -> here;
7050 */
7051 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7052 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7053 {
7054 if (cont_amount > 0)
7055 amount = cont_amount;
7056 else
7057 amount += ind_continuation;
7058 break;
7059 }
7060
7061 if (whilelevel == 0)
7062 {
7063 lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
7064 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7065 if (theline[0] == '{')
7066 amount += ind_open_extra;
7067 }
7068 ++whilelevel;
7069 }
7070
7071 /*
7072 * We are after a "normal" statement.
7073 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
7074 * indent of that other statement.
7075 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
7076 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
7077 */
7078 else
7079 {
7080 /*
7081 * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
7082 * may be lined up with the case label.
7083 */
7084 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
7085 && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
7086 {
7087 lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
7088 continue;
7089 }
7090
7091 /*
7092 * Handle "do {" line.
7093 */
7094 if (whilelevel > 0)
7095 {
7096 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7097 if (cin_isdo(l))
7098 {
7099 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7100 --whilelevel;
7101 continue;
7102 }
7103 }
7104
7105 /*
7106 * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
7107 * the amount for a continuation line.
7108 * x = 1;
7109 * y = foo +
7110 * -> here;
7111 * or
7112 * int x = 1;
7113 * int foo,
7114 * -> here;
7115 */
7116 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
7117 || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
7118 {
7119 if (cont_amount > 0)
7120 amount = cont_amount;
7121 else
7122 amount += ind_continuation;
7123 break;
7124 }
7125
7126 /*
7127 * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
7128 * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
7129 * x = 1; x = 1;
7130 * if (asdf) y = 2;
7131 * while (asdf) ->here;
7132 * here;
7133 * ->foo;
7134 */
7135 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
7136 {
7137 if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
7138 break;
7139 }
7140
7141 /*
7142 * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
7143 * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
7144 * a terminated line.
7145 */
7146 else
7147 {
7148 /*
7149 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
7150 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
7151 * the line. Helps for:
7152 * func(asdr,
7153 * asdfasdf);
7154 * here;
7155 */
7156term_again:
7157 l = ml_get_curline();
7158 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7159 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7160 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7161 {
7162 /*
7163 * Check if we are on a case label now. This is
7164 * handled above.
7165 * case xx: if ( asdf &&
7166 * asdf)
7167 */
7168 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7169 l = ml_get_curline();
7170 if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
7171 {
7172 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7173 continue;
7174 }
7175 }
7176
7177 /* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
7178 * with a statement after it.
7179 * case 1: { <-- don't use this { position
7180 * stat;
7181 * }
7182 * case 2:
7183 * stat;
7184 * }
7185 */
7186 iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7187
7188 /*
7189 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7190 * ignoring any jump label.
7191 */
7192 amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7193 &l, ind_maxcomment);
7194
7195 if (theline[0] == '{')
7196 amount += ind_open_extra;
7197 /* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7198 if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
7199 amount -= ind_open_extra;
7200 lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7201
7202 /*
7203 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7204 * that block.
7205 */
7206 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7207 if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7208 && (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7209 != NULL) /* XXX */
7210 {
7211 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7212 /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7213 /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7214 l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7215 if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7216 goto term_again;
7217 ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7218 }
7219 }
7220 }
7221 }
7222 }
7223 }
7224
7225 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7226 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7227 amount += ind_comment;
7228 }
7229
7230 /*
7231 * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7232 *
7233 * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7234 * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7235 * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7236 * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7237 */
7238 else
7239 {
7240 /*
7241 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7242 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7243 * of a function
7244 */
7245
7246 if (theline[0] == '{')
7247 {
7248 amount = ind_first_open;
7249 }
7250
7251 /*
7252 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7253 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7254 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7255 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7256 */
7257 else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7258 && !cin_nocode(theline)
7259 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7260 && !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7261 && cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7262 && !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7263 {
7264 amount = ind_func_type;
7265 }
7266 else
7267 {
7268 amount = 0;
7269 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7270
7271 /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7272
7273 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7274 {
7275 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7276 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7277
7278 l = ml_get_curline();
7279
7280 /*
7281 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7282 */ /* XXX */
7283 if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7284 {
7285 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7286 continue;
7287 }
7288
7289 /*
7290 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7291 * initialization?
7292 */ /* XXX */
7293 if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7294 && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7295 {
7296 if (col == 0)
7297 {
7298 amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7299 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7300 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7301 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7302 amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7303 + ind_cpp_baseclass; /* XXX */
7304 }
7305 else
7306 {
7307 curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7308 getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7309 amount = (int)col;
7310 }
7311 break;
7312 }
7313
7314 /*
7315 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7316 */
7317 if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7318 continue;
7319
7320 if (cin_nocode(l))
7321 continue;
7322
7323 /*
7324 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7325 * indentation:
7326 * int foo,
7327 * bar;
7328 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7329 * enum foobar
7330 * {
7331 * ...
7332 * } foo,
7333 * bar;
7334 */
7335 n = 0;
7336 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7337 || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7338 {
7339 /* take us back to opening paren */
7340 if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7341 && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7342 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7343 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7344
7345 /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7346 * back to the first line with a backslash:
7347 * char *foo = "bla\
7348 * bla",
7349 * here;
7350 */
7351 while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7352 {
7353 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7354 if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7355 break;
7356 --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7357 }
7358
7359 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7360
7361 if (amount == 0)
7362 amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7363 if (amount == 0)
7364 amount = ind_continuation;
7365 break;
7366 }
7367
7368 /*
7369 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7370 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7371 */
7372 if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum)) /* XXX */
7373 break;
7374 l = ml_get_curline();
7375
7376 /*
7377 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function. Put
7378 * current line at the left margin. For when 'cino' has "fs".
7379 */
7380 if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7381 break;
7382
7383 /* (matching {)
7384 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7385 * comments) align at column 0. For example:
7386 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7387 * / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7388 */
7389 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7390 break;
7391
7392 /*
7393 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7394 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7395 * parameters.
7396 */
7397 if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7398 {
7399 amount = ind_param;
7400 break;
7401 }
7402
7403 /*
7404 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7405 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7406 * int foo,
7407 * bar;
7408 * indent_to_0 here;
7409 */
7410 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7411 {
7412 l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7413 if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7414 || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7415 break;
7416 l = ml_get_curline();
7417 }
7418
7419 /*
7420 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7421 * use the indent of this line.
7422 *
7423 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7424 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7425 */
7426 find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7427
7428 if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7429 ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7430 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7431 amount = get_indent(); /* XXX */
7432 break;
7433 }
7434
7435 /* add extra indent for a comment */
7436 if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7437 amount += ind_comment;
7438
7439 /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7440 * "asdfasdf\
7441 * here";
7442 * char *foo = "asdf\
7443 * here";
7444 */
7445 if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7446 {
7447 l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7448 if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7449 {
7450 cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7451 if (cur_amount > 0)
7452 amount = cur_amount;
7453 else if (cur_amount == 0)
7454 amount += ind_continuation;
7455 }
7456 }
7457 }
7458 }
7459
7460theend:
7461 /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7462 curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7463
7464 vim_free(linecopy);
7465
7466 if (amount < 0)
7467 return 0;
7468 return amount;
7469}
7470
7471 static int
7472find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7473 int lookfor;
7474 linenr_T ourscope;
7475 int ind_maxparen;
7476 int ind_maxcomment;
7477{
7478 char_u *look;
7479 pos_T *theirscope;
7480 char_u *mightbeif;
7481 int elselevel;
7482 int whilelevel;
7483
7484 if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7485 {
7486 elselevel = 1;
7487 whilelevel = 0;
7488 }
7489 else
7490 {
7491 elselevel = 0;
7492 whilelevel = 1;
7493 }
7494
7495 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7496
7497 while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7498 {
7499 curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7500 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7501
7502 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7503 if (cin_iselse(look)
7504 || cin_isif(look)
7505 || cin_isdo(look) /* XXX */
7506 || cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7507 {
7508 /*
7509 * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7510 * we must be out of scope...
7511 */
7512 theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment); /* XXX */
7513 if (theirscope == NULL)
7514 break;
7515
7516 /*
7517 * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7518 * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7519 * out of luck too.
7520 */
7521 if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7522 break;
7523
7524 /*
7525 * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7526 * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7527 * different scope...
7528 */
7529 if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7530 continue;
7531
7532 /*
7533 * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7534 * then we need to go back to another if, so
7535 * increment elselevel
7536 */
7537 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7538 if (cin_iselse(look))
7539 {
7540 mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7541 if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7542 ++elselevel;
7543 continue;
7544 }
7545
7546 /*
7547 * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7548 * another "do", so increment whilelevel. XXX
7549 */
7550 if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7551 {
7552 ++whilelevel;
7553 continue;
7554 }
7555
7556 /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7557 look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7558 if (cin_isif(look))
7559 {
7560 elselevel--;
7561 /*
7562 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7563 * get in the way.
7564 */
7565 if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7566 whilelevel = 0;
7567 }
7568
7569 /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7570 if (cin_isdo(look))
7571 whilelevel--;
7572
7573 /*
7574 * if we've used up all the elses, then
7575 * this must be the if that we want!
7576 * match the indent level of that if.
7577 */
7578 if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7579 {
7580 return OK;
7581 }
7582 }
7583 }
7584 return FAIL;
7585}
7586
7587# if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7588/*
7589 * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7590 */
7591 int
7592get_expr_indent()
7593{
7594 int indent;
7595 pos_T pos;
7596 int save_State;
7597
7598 pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7599 set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7600 ++sandbox;
7601 indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7602 --sandbox;
7603
7604 /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7605 * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7606 * command. */
7607 save_State = State;
7608 State = INSERT;
7609 curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7610 check_cursor();
7611 State = save_State;
7612
7613 /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7614 if (indent < 0)
7615 indent = get_indent();
7616
7617 return indent;
7618}
7619# endif
7620
7621#endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7622
7623#if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7624
7625static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7626
7627 static int
7628lisp_match(p)
7629 char_u *p;
7630{
7631 char_u buf[LSIZE];
7632 int len;
7633 char_u *word = p_lispwords;
7634
7635 while (*word != NUL)
7636 {
7637 (void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7638 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7639 if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7640 return TRUE;
7641 }
7642 return FALSE;
7643}
7644
7645/*
7646 * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7647 * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7648 * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7649 * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, dirk@rave.org
7650 *
7651 * TODO:
7652 * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7653 * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7654 * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7655 * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7656 * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7657 * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007658 * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7659 * I tried to fix the first two issues.
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007660 */
7661 int
7662get_lisp_indent()
7663{
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007664 pos_T *pos, realpos, paren;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007665 int amount;
7666 char_u *that;
7667 colnr_T col;
7668 colnr_T firsttry;
7669 int parencount, quotecount;
7670 int vi_lisp;
7671
7672 /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7673 vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7674
7675 realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7676 curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7677
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007678 if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7679 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7680 else
7681 {
7682 paren = *pos;
7683 pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7684 if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7685 pos = &paren;
7686 }
7687 if (pos != NULL)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007688 {
7689 /* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7690 * line that is at the same () level. */
7691 amount = -1;
7692 parencount = 0;
7693
7694 while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7695 {
7696 if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7697 continue;
7698 for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7699 {
7700 if (*that == ';')
7701 {
7702 while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7703 ++that;
7704 continue;
7705 }
7706 if (*that == '\\')
7707 {
7708 if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7709 ++that;
7710 continue;
7711 }
7712 if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7713 {
7714 that++;
7715 while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7716 ++that;
7717 }
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007718 if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007719 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007720 else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007721 --parencount;
7722 }
7723 if (parencount == 0)
7724 {
7725 amount = get_indent();
7726 break;
7727 }
7728 }
7729
7730 if (amount == -1)
7731 {
7732 curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7733 curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7734 col = pos->col;
7735
7736 that = ml_get_curline();
7737
7738 if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7739 amount = 2;
7740 else
7741 {
7742 amount = 0;
7743 while (*that && col)
7744 {
7745 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7746 col--;
7747 }
7748
7749 /*
7750 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7751 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7752 *
7753 * (let ((a 1)) instead (let ((a 1))
7754 * (...)) of (...))
7755 */
7756
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007757 if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7758 && lisp_match(that + 1))
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007759 amount += 2;
7760 else
7761 {
7762 that++;
7763 amount++;
7764 firsttry = amount;
7765
7766 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7767 {
7768 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7769 ++that;
7770 }
7771
7772 if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7773 {
7774 /* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7775 * argument if it is more than one line */
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007776 if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007777 firsttry++;
7778
7779 parencount = 0;
7780 quotecount = 0;
7781
7782 if (vi_lisp
7783 || (*that != '"'
7784 && *that != '\''
7785 && *that != '#'
7786 && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7787 {
7788 while (*that
7789 && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7790 || quotecount
7791 || parencount)
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007792 && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007793 && !quotecount
7794 && !parencount
7795 && vi_lisp)))
7796 {
7797 if (*that == '"')
7798 quotecount = !quotecount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007799 if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7800 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007801 ++parencount;
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007802 if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7803 && !quotecount)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007804 --parencount;
7805 if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7806 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7807 (colnr_T)amount);
7808 amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7809 (colnr_T)amount);
7810 }
7811 }
7812 while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7813 {
7814 amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7815 that++;
7816 }
7817 if (!*that || *that == ';')
7818 amount = firsttry;
7819 }
7820 }
7821 }
7822 }
7823 }
7824 else
Bram Moolenaar325b7a22004-07-05 15:58:32 +00007825 amount = 0; /* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007826
7827 curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7828
7829 return amount;
7830}
7831#endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7832
7833 void
7834prepare_to_exit()
7835{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00007836#if defined(SIGHUP) && defined(SIG_IGN)
7837 /* Ignore SIGHUP, because a dropped connection causes a read error, which
7838 * makes Vim exit and then handling SIGHUP causes various reentrance
7839 * problems. */
Bram Moolenaar293ee4d2004-12-09 21:34:53 +00007840 signal(SIGHUP, SIG_IGN);
7841#endif
7842
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00007843#ifdef FEAT_GUI
7844 if (gui.in_use)
7845 {
7846 gui.dying = TRUE;
7847 out_trash(); /* trash any pending output */
7848 }
7849 else
7850#endif
7851 {
7852 windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7853
7854 /*
7855 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7856 * screen (if there are two screens).
7857 */
7858 settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7859#ifdef WIN3264
7860 if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7861#endif
7862 stoptermcap();
7863 out_flush();
7864 }
7865}
7866
7867/*
7868 * Preserve files and exit.
7869 * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7870 */
7871 void
7872preserve_exit()
7873{
7874 buf_T *buf;
7875
7876 prepare_to_exit();
7877
7878 out_str(IObuff);
7879 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7880 out_flush();
7881
7882 ml_close_notmod(); /* close all not-modified buffers */
7883
7884 for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7885 {
7886 if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7887 {
7888 OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7889 screen_start(); /* don't know where cursor is now */
7890 out_flush();
7891 ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE); /* preserve all swap files */
7892 break;
7893 }
7894 }
7895
7896 ml_close_all(FALSE); /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7897
7898 OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7899
7900 getout(1);
7901}
7902
7903/*
7904 * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7905 */
7906 int
7907vim_fexists(fname)
7908 char_u *fname;
7909{
7910 struct stat st;
7911
7912 if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
7913 return FALSE;
7914 return TRUE;
7915}
7916
7917/*
7918 * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
7919 * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
7920 * each line in the file. Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
7921 * time, because it can be a system call.
7922 */
7923
7924#ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
7925# ifdef FEAT_GUI /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
7926# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
7927# else
7928# define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
7929# endif
7930#endif
7931
7932static int breakcheck_count = 0;
7933
7934 void
7935line_breakcheck()
7936{
7937 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
7938 {
7939 breakcheck_count = 0;
7940 ui_breakcheck();
7941 }
7942}
7943
7944/*
7945 * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
7946 */
7947 void
7948fast_breakcheck()
7949{
7950 if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
7951 {
7952 breakcheck_count = 0;
7953 ui_breakcheck();
7954 }
7955}
7956
7957/*
7958 * Expand wildcards. Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
7959 * 'wildignore'.
7960 */
7961 int
7962expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
7963 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
7964 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
7965 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
7966 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
7967 int flags; /* EW_DIR, etc. */
7968{
7969 int retval;
7970 int i, j;
7971 char_u *p;
7972 int non_suf_match; /* number without matching suffix */
7973
7974 retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
7975
7976 /* When keeping all matches, return here */
7977 if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
7978 return retval;
7979
7980#ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
7981 /*
7982 * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
7983 */
7984 if (*p_wig)
7985 {
7986 char_u *ffname;
7987
7988 /* check all files in (*file)[] */
7989 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
7990 {
7991 ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
7992 if (ffname == NULL) /* out of memory */
7993 break;
7994# ifdef VMS
7995 vms_remove_version(ffname);
7996# endif
7997 if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
7998 {
7999 /* remove this matching file from the list */
8000 vim_free((*file)[i]);
8001 for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
8002 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
8003 --*num_file;
8004 --i;
8005 }
8006 vim_free(ffname);
8007 }
8008 }
8009#endif
8010
8011 /*
8012 * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
8013 */
8014 if (*num_file > 1)
8015 {
8016 non_suf_match = 0;
8017 for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
8018 {
8019 if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
8020 {
8021 /*
8022 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
8023 * of the list.
8024 */
8025 p = (*file)[i];
8026 for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
8027 (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
8028 (*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
8029 }
8030 }
8031 }
8032
8033 return retval;
8034}
8035
8036/*
8037 * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
8038 */
8039 int
8040match_suffix(fname)
8041 char_u *fname;
8042{
8043 int fnamelen, setsuflen;
8044 char_u *setsuf;
8045#define MAXSUFLEN 30 /* maximum length of a file suffix */
8046 char_u suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
8047
8048 fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
8049 setsuflen = 0;
8050 for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
8051 {
8052 setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
8053 if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
8054 && fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
8055 (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
8056 break;
8057 setsuflen = 0;
8058 }
8059 return (setsuflen != 0);
8060}
8061
8062#if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
8063
8064# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8065static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
8066static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
8067# endif
8068
8069# if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
8070/*
8071 * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32. It's here because
8072 * it's shared between these systems.
8073 */
8074# if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
8075# define _cdecl /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
8076# else
8077# ifdef __BORLANDC__
8078# define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
8079# endif
8080# endif
8081
8082/*
8083 * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
8084 */
8085 static int _cdecl
8086pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
8087{
Bram Moolenaar1cd871b2004-12-19 22:46:22 +00008088 return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b, -1));
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008089}
8090
8091# ifndef WIN3264
8092 static void
8093namelowcpy(
8094 char_u *d,
8095 char_u *s)
8096{
8097# ifdef DJGPP
8098 if (USE_LONG_FNAME) /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
8099 while (*s)
8100 *d++ = *s++;
8101 else
8102# endif
8103 while (*s)
8104 *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
8105 *d = NUL;
8106}
8107# endif
8108
8109/*
8110 * Recursively build up a list of files in "gap" matching the first wildcard
8111 * in `path'. Called by expand_wildcards().
8112 * Return the number of matches found.
8113 * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
8114 * at "path[wildoff]".
8115 */
8116 static int
8117dos_expandpath(
8118 garray_T *gap,
8119 char_u *path,
8120 int wildoff,
8121 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8122{
8123 char_u *buf;
8124 char_u *path_end;
8125 char_u *p, *s, *e;
8126 int start_len = gap->ga_len;
8127 int ok;
8128#ifdef WIN3264
8129 WIN32_FIND_DATA fb;
8130 HANDLE hFind = (HANDLE)0;
8131# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8132 WIN32_FIND_DATAW wfb;
8133 WCHAR *wn = NULL; /* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
8134# endif
8135#else
8136 struct ffblk fb;
8137#endif
8138 int matches;
8139 int starts_with_dot;
8140 int len;
8141 char_u *pat;
8142 regmatch_T regmatch;
8143 char_u *matchname;
8144
8145 /* make room for file name */
8146 buf = alloc((unsigned int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
8147 if (buf == NULL)
8148 return 0;
8149
8150 /*
8151 * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
8152 * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
8153 */
8154 p = buf;
8155 s = buf;
8156 e = NULL;
8157 path_end = path;
8158 while (*path_end != NUL)
8159 {
8160 /* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
8161 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
8162 if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
8163 *p++ = *path_end++;
8164 else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
8165 {
8166 if (e != NULL)
8167 break;
8168 s = p + 1;
8169 }
8170 else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
8171 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
8172 e = p;
8173#ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8174 if (has_mbyte)
8175 {
8176 len = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(path_end);
8177 STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
8178 p += len;
8179 path_end += len;
8180 }
8181 else
8182#endif
8183 *p++ = *path_end++;
8184 }
8185 e = p;
8186 *e = NUL;
8187
8188 /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
8189 /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
8190 * component. */
8191 for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8192 if (rem_backslash(p))
8193 {
8194 STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8195 --e;
8196 --s;
8197 }
8198
8199 starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8200 pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8201 if (pat == NULL)
8202 {
8203 vim_free(buf);
8204 return 0;
8205 }
8206
8207 /* compile the regexp into a program */
8208 regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE; /* Always ignore case */
8209 regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8210 vim_free(pat);
8211
8212 if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8213 {
8214 vim_free(buf);
8215 return 0;
8216 }
8217
8218 /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8219 matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8220
8221 /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8222 STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8223#ifdef WIN3264
8224# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8225 if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8226 {
8227 /* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'. Attempt using the
8228 * wide function. If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8229 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8230 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8231 if (wn != NULL)
8232 {
8233 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8234 if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8235 && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8236 {
8237 vim_free(wn);
8238 wn = NULL;
8239 }
8240 }
8241 }
8242
8243 if (wn == NULL)
8244# endif
8245 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8246 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8247#else
8248 /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8249 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8250 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8251#endif
8252
8253 while (ok)
8254 {
8255#ifdef WIN3264
8256# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8257 if (wn != NULL)
8258 p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL); /* p is allocated here */
8259 else
8260# endif
8261 p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8262#else
8263 p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8264#endif
8265 /* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for. Accept
8266 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8267 if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8268 && (matchname == NULL
8269 || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8270 {
8271#ifdef WIN3264
8272 STRCPY(s, p);
8273#else
8274 namelowcpy(s, p);
8275#endif
8276 len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8277 STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8278 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8279 {
8280 /* need to expand another component of the path */
8281 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8282 (void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags);
8283 }
8284 else
8285 {
8286 /* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8287 /* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8288 if (*path_end != 0)
8289 backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8290 if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0) /* add existing file */
8291 addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8292 }
8293 }
8294
8295#ifdef WIN3264
8296# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8297 if (wn != NULL)
8298 {
8299 vim_free(p);
8300 ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8301 }
8302 else
8303# endif
8304 ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8305#else
8306 ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8307#endif
8308
8309 /* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8310 * itself. Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8311 if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8312 {
8313 STRCPY(s, matchname);
8314#ifdef WIN3264
8315 FindClose(hFind);
8316# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8317 if (wn != NULL)
8318 {
8319 vim_free(wn);
8320 wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8321 if (wn != NULL)
8322 hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8323 }
8324 if (wn == NULL)
8325# endif
8326 hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8327 ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8328#else
8329 ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8330 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8331#endif
8332 vim_free(matchname);
8333 matchname = NULL;
8334 }
8335 }
8336
8337#ifdef WIN3264
8338 FindClose(hFind);
8339# ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8340 vim_free(wn);
8341# endif
8342#endif
8343 vim_free(buf);
8344 vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8345 vim_free(matchname);
8346
8347 matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8348 if (matches > 0)
8349 qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8350 sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8351 return matches;
8352}
8353
8354 int
8355mch_expandpath(
8356 garray_T *gap,
8357 char_u *path,
8358 int flags) /* EW_* flags */
8359{
8360 return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags);
8361}
8362# endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8363
8364/*
8365 * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8366 *
8367 * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8368 * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8369 *
8370 * Return FAIL when no single file was found. In this case "num_file" is not
8371 * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8372 * Return OK when some files found. "num_file" is set to the number of
8373 * matches, "file" to the array of matches. Call FreeWild() later.
8374 */
8375 int
8376gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8377 int num_pat; /* number of input patterns */
8378 char_u **pat; /* array of input patterns */
8379 int *num_file; /* resulting number of files */
8380 char_u ***file; /* array of resulting files */
8381 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8382{
8383 int i;
8384 garray_T ga;
8385 char_u *p;
8386 static int recursive = FALSE;
8387 int add_pat;
8388
8389 /*
8390 * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user". If this fails,
8391 * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here. In this case, always
8392 * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible. Otherwise,
8393 * return FAIL.
8394 */
8395 if (recursive)
8396#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8397 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8398#else
8399 return FAIL;
8400#endif
8401
8402#ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8403 /*
8404 * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8405 * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion. This
8406 * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8407 * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8408 */
8409 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8410 {
8411 if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8412# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8413 && !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8414# endif
8415 )
8416 return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8417 }
8418#endif
8419
8420 recursive = TRUE;
8421
8422 /*
8423 * The matching file names are stored in a growarray. Init it empty.
8424 */
8425 ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8426
8427 for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8428 {
8429 add_pat = -1;
8430 p = pat[i];
8431
8432#ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8433 if (vim_backtick(p))
8434 add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8435 else
8436#endif
8437 {
8438 /*
8439 * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8440 */
8441 if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8442 {
8443 p = expand_env_save(p);
8444 if (p == NULL)
8445 p = pat[i];
8446#ifdef UNIX
8447 /*
8448 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8449 * variable, use the shell to do that. Discard previously
8450 * found file names and start all over again.
8451 */
8452 else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8453 {
8454 vim_free(p);
8455 ga_clear(&ga);
8456 i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8457 flags);
8458 recursive = FALSE;
8459 return i;
8460 }
8461#endif
8462 }
8463
8464 /*
8465 * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8466 * the list. If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8467 * the pattern.
8468 * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8469 * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8470 */
8471 if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8472 add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8473 }
8474
8475 if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8476 {
8477 char_u *t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8478
8479#if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8480 slash_to_colon(t);
8481#endif
8482 /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs. Makes
8483 * "vim c:/" work. */
8484 if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8485 addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8486 else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8487 addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8488 vim_free(t);
8489 }
8490
8491 if (p != pat[i])
8492 vim_free(p);
8493 }
8494
8495 *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8496 *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8497
8498 recursive = FALSE;
8499
8500 return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8501}
8502
8503# ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8504
8505/*
8506 * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8507 */
8508 static int
8509vim_backtick(p)
8510 char_u *p;
8511{
8512 return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8513}
8514
8515/*
8516 * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8517 * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8518 * Returns number of file names found.
8519 */
8520 static int
8521expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8522 garray_T *gap;
8523 char_u *pat;
8524 int flags; /* EW_* flags */
8525{
8526 char_u *p;
8527 char_u *cmd;
8528 char_u *buffer;
8529 int cnt = 0;
8530 int i;
8531
8532 /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8533 cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8534 if (cmd == NULL)
8535 return 0;
8536
8537#ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8538 if (*cmd == '=') /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8539 buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p);
8540 else
8541#endif
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008542 buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, NULL,
8543 (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008544 vim_free(cmd);
8545 if (buffer == NULL)
8546 return 0;
8547
8548 cmd = buffer;
8549 while (*cmd != NUL)
8550 {
8551 cmd = skipwhite(cmd); /* skip over white space */
8552 p = cmd;
8553 while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8554 ++p;
8555 /* add an entry if it is not empty */
8556 if (p > cmd)
8557 {
8558 i = *p;
8559 *p = NUL;
8560 addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8561 *p = i;
8562 ++cnt;
8563 }
8564 cmd = p;
8565 while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8566 ++cmd;
8567 }
8568
8569 vim_free(buffer);
8570 return cnt;
8571}
8572# endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8573
8574/*
8575 * Add a file to a file list. Accepted flags:
8576 * EW_DIR add directories
8577 * EW_FILE add files
8578 * EW_NOTFOUND add even when it doesn't exist
8579 * EW_ADDSLASH add slash after directory name
8580 */
8581 void
8582addfile(gap, f, flags)
8583 garray_T *gap;
8584 char_u *f; /* filename */
8585 int flags;
8586{
8587 char_u *p;
8588 int isdir;
8589
8590 /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8591 if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8592 return;
8593
8594#ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8595 /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8596 if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8597 return;
8598#endif
8599
8600 isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8601 if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8602 return;
8603
8604 /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8605 if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8606 return;
8607
8608 p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8609 if (p == NULL)
8610 return;
8611
8612 STRCPY(p, f);
8613#ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8614 slash_adjust(p);
8615#endif
8616 /*
8617 * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8618 */
8619#ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8620 if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8621 add_pathsep(p);
8622#endif
8623 ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008624}
8625#endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8626
8627#if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8628
8629#ifndef SEEK_SET
8630# define SEEK_SET 0
8631#endif
8632#ifndef SEEK_END
8633# define SEEK_END 2
8634#endif
8635
8636/*
8637 * Get the stdout of an external command.
8638 * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8639 */
8640 char_u *
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008641get_cmd_output(cmd, infile, flags)
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008642 char_u *cmd;
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008643 char_u *infile; /* optional input file name */
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008644 int flags; /* can be SHELL_SILENT */
8645{
8646 char_u *tempname;
8647 char_u *command;
8648 char_u *buffer = NULL;
8649 int len;
8650 int i = 0;
8651 FILE *fd;
8652
8653 if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
8654 return NULL;
8655
8656 /* get a name for the temp file */
8657 if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
8658 {
8659 EMSG(_(e_notmp));
8660 return NULL;
8661 }
8662
8663 /* Add the redirection stuff */
Bram Moolenaarc0197e22004-09-13 20:26:32 +00008664 command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, infile, tempname);
Bram Moolenaar071d4272004-06-13 20:20:40 +00008665 if (command == NULL)
8666 goto done;
8667
8668 /*
8669 * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
8670 * Don't check timestamps here.
8671 */
8672 ++no_check_timestamps;
8673 call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
8674 --no_check_timestamps;
8675
8676 vim_free(command);
8677
8678 /*
8679 * read the names from the file into memory
8680 */
8681# ifdef VMS
8682 /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
8683 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
8684# else
8685 fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
8686# endif
8687
8688 if (fd == NULL)
8689 {
8690 EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
8691 goto done;
8692 }
8693
8694 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
8695 len = ftell(fd); /* get size of temp file */
8696 fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
8697
8698 buffer = alloc(len + 1);
8699 if (buffer != NULL)
8700 i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
8701 fclose(fd);
8702 mch_remove(tempname);
8703 if (buffer == NULL)
8704 goto done;
8705#ifdef VMS
8706 len = i; /* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
8707#endif
8708 if (i != len)
8709 {
8710 EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
8711 vim_free(buffer);
8712 buffer = NULL;
8713 }
8714 else
8715 buffer[len] = '\0'; /* make sure the buffer is terminated */
8716
8717done:
8718 vim_free(tempname);
8719 return buffer;
8720}
8721#endif
8722
8723/*
8724 * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
8725 * functions.
8726 */
8727 void
8728FreeWild(count, files)
8729 int count;
8730 char_u **files;
8731{
8732 if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
8733 return;
8734#if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
8735 /*
8736 * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
8737 * been used???
8738 */
8739 _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
8740#else
8741 while (count--)
8742 vim_free(files[count]);
8743 vim_free(files);
8744#endif
8745}
8746
8747/*
8748 * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
8749 * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
8750 * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
8751 */
8752 int
8753goto_im()
8754{
8755 return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
8756}